Professional Documents
Culture Documents
62683en PDF
62683en PDF
Connection Manual
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or
may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a damage of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
s–1
B–62683EN/03 Table of Contents
Definition Of Warning, Caution, And Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–1
I. HARDWARE
1. PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2. CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3. INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS OF CNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.2 POWER CAPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.3 DESIGN ANDINSTALLATIONCONDITIONS OF THE TOOL MAGNETIC CABINET . . . . . . . 9
3.4 THERMAL DESIGN OF THE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.4.1 Temperature Rise within the Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.4.2 Cooling by Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.4.3 Heat Loss of Each Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.5 INSTALLING THE HEAT EXCHANGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.5.1 Cooling Fin A/B/C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.5.2 Heat Exchanger for CRT/MDI Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.5.3 The Heat Pipe Type Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.5.3.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.6 ACTION AGAINST NOISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.6.1 Separating Signal Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.6.2 Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.6.3 Connecting the Frame Ground (FG) of the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.6.4 Noise Suppressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.6.5 Cable Clamp and Shield Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.7 CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.7.1 Installation of the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.7.2 Battery for Memory Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.8 CABLE LEAD–IN DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.9 CONNECTOR LAYOUT OF UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
4. TOTAL CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
4.1 CONNECTION DIAGRAM AT USING BUILT–IN I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
4.2 CONNECTION DIAGRAM AT USING BUILT–IN I/O CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
c–1
Table of Contents B–62683EN/03
c–2
B–62683EN/03
c–3
Table of Contents B–62683EN/03
c–4
B–62683EN/03
8. INTERLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
8.1 INTERLOCK SIGNAL (INPUT) *IT<G008#0>, *RILK<X000#6, X1000#6> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
8.2 AXIS INTERLOCK SIGNAL (INPUT) *ITn <G130> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
8.3 INTERLOCK SIGNAL FOR EACH AXIS AND DIRECTION (INPUT) +MITn,
–MITn <G132, G134> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
14.SCREEN STATE SIGNALS (OUTPUT) DPL0, DPL1, DPL2 <F254 #0 TO #2> . 306
c–5
Table of Contents B–62683EN/03
18.SKIP SIGNALS (INPUT) SKIP, SKP2, SKP3, SKIP4<X000#7, #0, #1, #2>
<X1000#7, #0, #1, #2> SKIPP <G212#7> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
c–6
B–62683EN/03
APPENDIX
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
c–7
Table of Contents B–62683EN/03
c–8
I. HARDWARE
B–62683EN/02 HARDWARE 1. PREFACE
1
Related manuals The table below lists manuals related to the Power Mate–H.
In the table, this manual is marked with an asterisk (*).
3
2. CONFIGURATION HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
2 CONFIGURATION
4
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 2. CONFIGURATION
Power
Heat
supply Distribution
exchanger
24V DC board
(3.6)
(5.2)
Relay
connector
Computer
(7.9)
Machine
operator’s
I/O unit panel
Note1 (6.3)
or
Power
magnetic Sensor/actuator
I/O card circuit
(6.5)
NOTE 1 Refer to the “FANUC I/O Unit Model A Connecting Maintenance Manual (B-61813E)”.
NOTE 2 Refer to the “FANUC CONTROL MOTOR AMPLIFIER DESCRIPTIONS (B-65162E)”.
NOTE 3 Refer to the “FANUC SERVO MOTOR α series DESCRIPTIONS (B-65142E)”or “FANUC SERVO
MOTOR β series DESCRIPTIONS (B–65232EN)”.
5
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
3 INSTALLATION
6
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION
3.1 The peripheral units, such as the control unit and CRT/MDI, have been
designed on the assumption that they are housed in closed cabinets. In
ENVIRONMENTAL this manual ”cabinet” refers to the following:
REQUIREMENTS OF D Cabinet manufactured by the machine tool builder for housing
CNC the control unit or peripheral units;
D Cabinet for housing the flexible turnkey system provided by
FANUC ;
D Operation pendant, manufactured by the machine tool builder,
for housing the CRT/MDI unit or operator’s panel.
D Equivalent to the above.
The environmental conditions when installing these internal cabinets
shall conform to the following table. Section 3.3 describes the installation
and design conditions of a cabinet satisfying these conditions.
Inter of cabinet :
Temperature In operation
0_C to 55_C
Room temperature In store or transportation –20_C to +60_C
Change in
1.1°C/minute max.
temperature
30% to 95%
Relative humidity
(no condensation)
Vibration In operation: 0.5G or less
Inter of units: Each unit should be placed in a cabinet
to keep it from pollutants (such as dust, coolant, or-
ganic solvents, acid, corrosive gas, and salt).
Environment
Heat sink of outer of cabinet: The heat sinks should
be protected from direct exposure to coolant, lubri-
cant, and metal chips.
7
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
3.2 The units listed below require an external regulated supply voltage of 24
VDC 10% (including an instantaneous value).
POWER CAPACITY
Table 3.2 Power supply capacity
Unit Power supply capacity
Power Mate–H control unit 1.8 A (Another 1A required for the FANUC
RS–232–C device is used) (*)
External I/O card 500 + 7.3 x n (mA) where n is the number of in-
put points that are turned on simultaneously (*)
NOTE
(*) The Power Mate–H requires an additional 24–V power
supply for DOs. See descriptions about the output signal in
Chapter 6 for details.
8
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION
9
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
D The units must be installed or arranged in the cabinet so that they are
easy to inspect and maintain.
D Allow a space the control unit in order to make it easy to remove
built–in I/O card cables and DPL/MDI cable.
D The CRT screen can be distorted by magnetic interference.
Arranging magnetic sources must be done with care.
If magnetic sources (such as transformers, fan motors,
electromagnetic contactors, solenoids, and relays) are located near the
CRT display, they frequently distort the display screen. To prevent
this, the CRT display and the magnetic sources generally must be kept
300 mm apart. If the CRT display and the magnetic sources are not
300 mm apart, the screen distortion may be suppressed by changing
the direction in which the magnetic sources are installed.
The magnetic intensity is not constant, and it is often increased by
magnetic interference from multiple magnetic sources interacting
with each other. As a result, simply keeping the CRT and the magnetic
sources 300 mm apart may not be enough to prevent the distortion.
If they cannot be kept apart, or if the CRT screen remains distorted
despite the distance, cover the screen with a magnetic shield.
D The installation conditions of the I/O unit must be satisfied.
To obtain good ventilation in the module, the I/O unit must be installed
in the direction shown in the following figure. Clearances of 100 mm
or more both above and below the I/O unit are required for wiring and
ventilation.
Equipment radiating too much heat must not be put below the I/O unit.
Top
I/O base unit
(No screws or protrusions shall
extend from the bottom of this
unit.)
Bottom
10
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION
3.4 The internal air temperature of the cabinet is higher than the outside
temperature because the units and parts installed in the cabinet generate
THERMAL DESIGN heat. Since the generated heat is radiated from the surface of the cabinet,
OF THE CABINET the temperature of the air in the cabinet and the outside air balance at
certain heat levels. If the amount of heat generated is constant, the larger
the surface area of the cabinet, the less the internal temperature rises. The
thermal design of the cabinet refers to calculating the heat generated in the
cabinet, evaluating the surface area of the cabinet, and enlarging that
surface area by installing heat exchangers in the cabinet, if necessary.
Such a design method is described in the following subsections.
3.4.1 The cooling capacity of a cabinet made of sheet metal is generally 6 W/°C
Temperature Rise per 1m2 surface area, that is, when the 6W heat source is contained in a
cabinet having a surface area of 1 m2, the temperature of the air in the
within the Cabinet cabinet rises by 1°C. In this case the surface area of the cabinet refers to
the area useful in cooling , that is, the area obtained by subtracting the area
of the cabinet touching the floor from the total surface area of the cabinet.
There are two preconditions : The air in the cabinet must be circuited by
the fun, and the temperature of the air in the cabinet must be almost
constant.The following expression must then be satisfied to limit the
difference in temperature between the air in the cabinet and the outside air
to arbitrary temperature (°C) or less when the temperature in the cabinet
rises:
Internal heat loss P [W] x
6[W/m2⋅°C] × surface area S[m2]× rise in temperature [°C]
For example, a cabinet having a surface area of 4m2 has a cooling capacity
of 24W/°C. To limit the internal temperature increase to 10°C under these
conditions, the internal heat must not exceed 240W. If the actual internal
heat is 320W, however, the temperature in the cabinet rises by 13°C or
more. When this happens, the cooling capacity of the cabinet must be
improved using the heat exchanger described next.
3.4.2 If the temperature rise cannot be limited by the cooling capacity of the
Cooling by Heat cabinet, a heat exchanger must be added. The heat exchanger forcibly
applies the air from both the inside and outside of the cabinet to the
Exchanger cooling fin to obtain effective cooling. The heat exchanger enlarges the
surface area. Section 3.5 explains five heat exchangers supplied by
FANUC. Select one of these according to the application.
If cooling fin A is used for the cabinet, the total cooling capacity of a
cabinet having a surface area of 4 m2 in the example above is improved
as follows :
6W/m2⋅°C × 4m2 + 9.1W/°C= 33.1W/°C
The calculated value verifies that even if the internal heat is 320 W, the
temperature rise can be limited to less than 10°C.
See Section 3.5 for installing the heat exchanger.
11
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
3.4.3
Heat Loss of Each Unit Name Heat loss
Power Mate–H control unit 35W
CRT/MDI unit 18W
Picture display CRT/MDI unit
Separate type CRT unit 14W
Separate type MDI unit 4W
Picture display separate type MDI unit
Separate type PDP unit 20W
Separate type LCD unit 10W
5W + 0.175W number of
External I/O card
Input ON points
I/O Unit AIF01A, AIF01B 1.2W
AID32A, AID32B 1.2W + 0.23W number of
input ON points
AID16C, AID16D 0.1W + 0.21W number of
input ON points
AID32E, AID32F 0.1W + 0.23W number of
input ON points
I/O Link connection unit 4W
12
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION
3.5 Table 3.5 lists the heat exchangers.Cooling fins A, B and C are not
provided with a fan. Note that a fan motor is required for any of these
INSTALLING THE cooling fins when it is used as a heat exchanger.
HEAT EXCHANGER
Table 3.5 List of Heat Exchangers
Ordering Cooling
Name Size
specification capacity
13
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
Outside
air flow
D Generally, install the cooling fins to the door. But be sure that the door
does not bend when installing the cooling fin. The cooling fins are
equipped with packing.
14
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION
External dimensions
196 183
90 Fan mounting
100 plate Mounting metal for
136 cooling fins (sheet met-
Terminal block for al about 3mm thick).
fan motor G–04
70
1000
570
(Attached to the
cooling fins. Its Cooling fins
4–M4
685
136 24.7
5 150
45
24.7 Door
4–M4 5 Mounting plate
mounting screw 168 40 for fan motor
180
188
770
260
PANEL CUT DRAWING NOTE1 Fan motor, mounting plate for fan motor and mounting
metal for cooling fins are not attached to the cooling fins.
70
164 NOTE2 Use two fan motors with about 50W power.
NOTE3 Weight : 6.5kg
15
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
72
25
for fan motor
60
300
435
Cooling fins
300
650
Fan motor
124
14 116
25
72
6–6 dia
Mounting
10
350 10 432 6 Mounting hole
hole for 24 Mounting plate
fan motor 370 6 for fan motor
10 418
4–M4 24 Terminal block for fan motor G–04 Door
(Attached to the cooling fins.
4–M4 370 Its height is 20mm)
350 Mounting diagram (example)
(Mounting hole for
124
116
400
30
135 60
Hole
25 300
16
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION
23
for fan motor
115
335
60
695
266
315
266 Cooling fins
970
Terminal block
210
for fan motor
287
Fan motor
60
G–04
6–M4 (Attached to the
10 8–6 dia.
10
Mounting 37
35
155
335
(This hole
775
combines
6–6 dia. hole or M5 mounting hole
stud bolt
287
and stud hole.) NOTE1 Fan motor and mounting plate for fan motor are not at-
60
514
25
17
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
3.5.2
Heat Exchanger for
CRT/MDI Unit
External dimensions of External dimensions of
finger guard external cooling fun
Weight : 0.65kg
Air inlet
Packing
Power terminal
M4 screw
200VAC 50Hz
200/220VAC
60Hz
48W
Air outlet
NOTE) External cooling fan and finger guard are attached beside cooling fin.
Fig.3.5.2(a) External dimensions of external cooling fan and cooling unit for CRT/MDI
(A02B–0060–K401)
18
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION
Heat exchanger
Outside Inside
Air outlet
Air outlet
Main body of
(4) heat exchanger
(3)
Air inlet
(1) Prepare
External cooling fan
mounting
(attached)
screws and
Finger guard
mounting panel
(1) (attached)
19
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
3.5.3
The Heat Pipe Type
Heat Exchanger
3.5.3.1 The heat pipe type heat exchanger is used for cooling the airtight cabinet
Installation of small sized electronic devices. It is a compact, lightweight, and
heat–efficient unit. Because the fan is built–in, it is used simply by
installing it, performing the ”panel cut’ operation.
Specifications Installation format Installation type in board
Fan Cooling ability (W/°C) 9 (50Hz when operating)
specifications
Voltage (V) 200VAC
Frequency (Hz) 50 60
Rating current (A) 0.28 0.24
Rating input (W) 28 26
Weight (kg) 4
Color Munsell signal N1.5
20
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION
External dimensions
17.5
Power
source AIR
terminal M4 FLOW
6–6 dia.
190
Earth
terminal
M4
External
415
fan unit
Internal
fan unit
190
AIR
FLOW
17.5
6 216 6 22.4 85
22.4
226
1.6
85
199
21
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
180
2.5
187.5
190
HOLE
6
175
190
3–5 dia.
214
22
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION
Installation method Please install the heat exchanger by the following sequence:
1 Take out the external fan unit from the heat exchanger main unit. (Fig.
1)
Detach the external fan unit installation screws A (2 pieces), take out
the unit from the main unit by sliding it down, and detach the earth
cable and the power cable to the fan. Also detach the installation screw
B (1 piece).
2 Install the heat exchanger main unit in the installation section which
has been panel cut. (Fig. 2)
When fastening down the heat exchanger main unit with the screws,
first, temporarily secure the panel and the heat exchanger main unit
with the installation screw B, which was taken out in 1). After that,
secure the main unit by the installation screws. In this case, the
external fan unit installation screw holes should be aligned with the
main unit screw holes. (Please provide the installation screws for the
heat exchanger main unit.)
Because this product is composed of plastic, set the value shown
below for the screw tightening torque.
Heat exchanger main unit (M4 screw) : 11 kgf.cm
External fan unit (M3 screw) : 5 kgf.cm
3 Connect the power cable and the earth cable to the external fan unit (the
unit detached in 1), and secure the installation screw A to the main unit
from the outside. (Fig. 2)
The installation is now complete.
Heat exchanger
main unit
23
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
3.6 The motion controller has been steadily reduced in size using
surface–mount and custom LSI technologies for electronic components.
ACTION AGAINST The motion controller also is designed to be protected from external noise.
NOISE However, it is difficult to measure the level and frequency of noise
quantitatively, and noise has many uncertain factors. It is important to
prevent both noise from being generated and generated noise from being
introduced into the motion controller. This precaution improves the
stability of the motion controller machine tool system.
The motion controller component units are often installed close to the
parts generating noise in the power magnetics cabinet. Possible noise
sources into the motion controller are capacitive coupling,
electromagnetic induction, and ground loops.
When designing the power magnetics cabinet, guard against noise in the
machine as described in the following section.
3.6.1 The cables used for the machine are classified as listed in the following table:
Separating Signal Process the cables in each group as described in the action column.
Lines
Group Signal line Action
Primary AC power line Bind the cables in group A separate-
ly (Note 1) from groups B and C
C, or
Secondary AC power line cover group A with an electromag-
A AC/DC power lines (containing the power lines for the servo motors) netic shield (Note 2).
See Section 3.6.4
3 6 4 and connect
AC/DC solenoid
spark killers or diodes with the sole-
AC/DC relay noid and relay.
DC solenoid (24VDC) Connect diodes with DC solenoid
y
and relay.
DC relay (24VDC) Bind the cables in group B separate-
ly from group
grou A,
A or cover group
grou B
B DC power line with an electromagnetic shield.
Separate group B as far from Group
DI/DO cable between the motion controller and power magnetics cabinet C as possible.
DI/DO cable between the motion controller and machine It is more desirable to cover group B
with the shield.
Cable between the motion controller and servo amplifier Bind the cables in group C sepa-
rately from group A
A, or cover group
Cable for position and velocity feedback
C with
t an e ect o ag et c shield.
a electromagnetic s ed
External pulse input Separate g
group C as far from Group
C Cable between the motion controller and the CRT/MDI B as possible.
RS–232–C interface cable Be sure tto perform
B f shield
hi ld proces-
sing in Section 3.6.5.
Batery cable
Other cables to be covered with the shield
NOTE
1 The groups must be 100mm or more apart from one another
when binding the cables in each group.
2 The electromagnetic shield refers to shielding between
groups with grounded steel plates.
24
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION
Cabinet
Duct
To operator’s
panel,
motor, etc.
Group A Group B, C
Cover
25
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
3.6.2 The following ground systems are provided for the CNC machine tool:
Ground D Signal ground system (SG)
The signal ground (SG) supplies the reference voltage (0V) of the
electrical signal system.
D Frame ground system (FG)
The frame ground system (FG) is used for safety, and suppressing
external and internal noises. In the frame ground system, the frames,
cases of the units, panels, and shields for the interface cables between
the units are connected.
D System ground system
The system ground system is used to connect the frame ground
systems connected between devices or units with the ground.
Cabinet Unit
Signal ground system
Frame ground system
Power Servo CNC System ground system
magnet- amplifier control
ics unit
unit Operator’s
Cable panel
Machine
tool
Power
magnetics
cabinet
PC board
Distribution board
Notes on connecting the D Connect the signal ground with the frame ground (FG) at only one
ground systems place in the Power Mate. (See 3.6.3)
D The grounding resistance of the system ground shall be 100 ohms or
less (class 3 grounding).
D The system ground cable must have enough cross–sectional area to
safely carry the accidental current flow into the system ground when
an accident such as a short circuit occurs.
(Generally, it must have the cross–sectional area of the AC power cable
or more.)
D Use the cable containing the AC power wire and the system ground
wire so that power is supplied with the ground wire connected.
26
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION
3.6.3 Connect the 0 V line of the electronic circuit in the control unit with the
Connecting the Frame ground plate of the cabinet via the frame ground (FG) terminal.
The SG terminal is located on the printed circuit board at the rear of the
Ground (FG) of the control unit.
Control Unit
FG terminals
(Faston terminals at
the controller)
To the other grounded plates
See the note below. Distribution
switchboard
in the cabinet
External distribution
switchboard
Class 3 grounding or
more strict grounding
MOST IMPORTANCE
Use the Faston terminals (A65L–0001–0148/2) for the frame ground. Also use 100 to 300 mm
stranded wire with a cross–section of 2 mm2 or more. Be sure to connect the frame ground of
the Power Mate to the grounded plates in the cabinet as shown above.
Otherwise, the Power Mate will be susceptible to noise.
27
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
3.6.4 The AC/DC solenoid and relay are used in the power magnetics cabinet.
Noise Suppressor A high pulse voltage is caused by coil inductance when these devices are
turned on or off.
This pulse voltage induced through the cable causes the electronic circuits
to be disturbed. In general, to reduce this pulse voltage, a spark killer is
used in AC circuits, while a diode is used in DC circuits.
Spark killer D Use a spark killer consisting of a resistor and capacitor in series. This
type of spark killer is called a CR spark killer.(Use it under AC)
(A varistor is useful in clamping the peak voltage of the pulse voltage,
but cannot suppress the sudden rise of the pulse voltage. FANUC
therefore recommends a CR spark killer.)
D The reference capacitance and resistance of the spark killer shall
conform to the following based on the current (I (A)) and DC
resistance of the stationary coil:
1) Resistance (R) : Equivalent DC resistance of the coil
I2 I2
2) Capacitance (C) : X (µF)
10 20
R C
Equivalent circuit of the spark killer
AC Spark killer
relay
Motor
Spark killer
Diode
Diode (used for direct–current circuits)
– +
Diode
Use a diode which can withstand a
voltage up to two times the applied
DC relay voltage and a current up to two times
the applied current.
28
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION
3.6.5 The Power Mate cables that require shielding should be clamped by the
Cable Clamp and method shown below. This cable clamp treatment is for both cable
support and proper grounding of the shield. To insure stable CNC system
Shield Processing operation, follow this cable clamp method.
Partially peel out the sheath and expose the shield. Push and clamp by
the plate metal fittings for clamp at the part. The ground plate must be
made by the machine tool builder, and set as follows :
Ground plate
Cable
Metal fittings
for clamp
40 to 80mm
29
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
ÇÇ
Machine side
installation
ÇÇ board
ÇÇ
Control unit
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Ground plate
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Metal fittings
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
for clamp
Shield cover
Ground terminal
(grounded)
For the ground plate, use a metal plate of 2 mm or thicker, which surface
is plated with nickel.
30
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION
Ground
8mm plate
12mm
20mm
Max. 55mm
28mm
6mm
17mm
31
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
3.7
CONTROL UNIT
10
360
10
65
32
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION
The control unit consists of a plastic box, fan motors and a PCB. Since
the control unit is provided with built-in fan motors, it does not require
the external air flow conditions described in Section 3.5. The air comes
into the control unit from the bottom and goes out through the fan motor,
which is located on the top of the control unit. Space as shown in Fig.
3.7.1 must be reserved not to disturb the air flow (,)
Additionally, keep the space (approx. 100mm) as wider as possible to pull
or to out the built–in I/O card cable at maintenance and DPL/MDI cable.
AIR FLOW
50mm
100mm
33
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
3.7.2 Part programs, offset data, and system parameters are stored in CMOS
Battery for Memory memory in the control unit. The power to the CMOS memory is backed
up by a lithium battery mounted on the front panel of the control unit. The
Backup above data is not lost even when the main battery goes dead. The backup
battery is mounted on the control unit at shipping. This battery can
maintain the contents of memory for about a year.
The voltage of the battery becomes low, alarm message ”BAT” blinks on
the CRT or MDI display. If a display unit such as a CRT or DPL is
disconnected at all times, the battery alarm signal BAL <F001#2> is
output to the PMC. So, ensure that an alarm indication is provided, for
example, on the machine operator’s panel. When this alarm is displayed,
replace the battery as soon as possible. In general, the battery can be
replaced within one or two weeks, however, this depends on the system
configuration.
If the voltage of the battery becomes any lower, memory can no longer
be backed up. Turning on the power to the control unit in this state causes
system alarm 910 (RAM parity alarm) to occur because the contents of
memory are lost. Clear the entire memory and reenter data after replacing
the battery. To clear and reenter, it is required to save data in the memory
card or floppy.
The power to the control unit must be turned on when the battery is
replaced. If the battery is disconnected when the power is turned off, the
contents of memory are lost.
Observe the following precautions for lithium batteries:
WARNING
If an unspecified battery is used, it may explode.
Replace the battery only with the specified battery
(A02B–0118–K111).
34
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION
WARNING
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the
power to the machine (Power Mate) switched on, and hold
the machine at an emergency stop. Because this work must
be carried out while the power is kept switched on and the
cabinet is open, only the personnel who have been trained
for safety are allowed to engage in the work. When
replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the
high–voltage circuit section (marked and shielded with
a shock hazard prevention cover). If you touch the
high–voltage circuit section when it is uncovered, you will
get an electric shock.
Control unit
Â
Â
Battery Â
(A02B–0118–K111)
35
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
BATTERY
Connector
in side of cable
Connector
in side of
P.C.B
Battery
36
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION
3.8
CABLE LEAD–IN
DIAGRAM
Air out
Weight : 2.2Kg
Air in
NOTE
Connectors JD14 and JD15 for the CRT link are provided on
the front of the unit. Never make connections to the
connectors at the lower part of the unit.
37
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
3.9
CONNECTOR
LAYOUT OF UNIT
fuse (5.0A)
Left side M4
CB 128 DPL/MDI
Built–in I/O
Memory card
+24VDC input Right side
CB 129
Built–in I/O FAS1
LED display Frame ground (FG terminal)
Rotary switch RSW JA23
Servo check1 (1st to 4th axis)
JA24
Servo AMP1 Servo check2 (5th to 6th axis)
Servo AMP2
Servo AMP3
Servo AMP4
Servo AMP5
RS–232–C
38
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 4. TOTAL CONNECTION
4 TOTAL CONNECTION
39
4. TOTAL CONNECTION HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
4.1
CONNECTION
DIAGRAM AT USING
BUILT–IN I/O
Upper control unit
Memory
card
Servo motor
Servo motor
Servo motor
Servo motor
Servo motor
Servo motor
Relay connector
Power magnetic
I/O card
Power magnetic
I/O UNIT–MODEL A
Power magnetic
CRT/MDI unit
40
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 4. TOTAL CONNECTION
4.2
CONNECTION
DIAGRAM AT USING
BUILT–IN I/O CARD
Upper control unit
Memory
card
Servo motor
Servo motor
Servo motor
Servo motor
Servo motor
Servo motor
Relay connector
Power magnetic
I/O card
Power magnetic
I/O UNIT–MODEL A
Power magnetic
CRT/MDI unit
Switch for selection
Terminal unit mode
(PCR connector)
41
5. CONNECTION OF INPUT
POWER SUPPLY HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
42
5. CONNECTION OF INPUT
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE POWER SUPPLY
5.1
POWER SUPPLY
CAPACITY
24 VDC capacity
J30 Power Mate–H
CP1
External power supply Controller
controller →1.8 A
24 VDC "10%
(for main unit) (Another 1A required for the
CB128, CB129 FANUC RS–232–C device is used.)
J86, J87
J48
CPD1 Power Mate–H
External power supply CRT/MDI
S CRT/MDI →1.0 A
24 VDC "10%
S PDP, MDI
(for display unit) PDP, MDI
→2.2 A
LCD, MDI
→1.0 A
I/O card
J24 I/O card →Approx.1.0 A
CP61
J24
CP32
I/O unit
NOTE
The above power supply capacity values only serve as
guidelines. They do not include the capacity required for
DOs.
43
5. CONNECTION OF INPUT
POWER SUPPLY HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
NOTE
Detailed power requirement of the DOs of the internal I/O:
Total maximum load current for the DOs (including an
instantaneous value) plus 10 mA
Detailed power requirement of the DOs of the built–in I/O
card: Total maximum load current for the DOs (including an
instantaneous value) plus 10 mA
NOTE
The detailed power requirement of the IO card is a sum of
the following values.
D Control circuit: 500 mA
D DI: 7.3 x n mA (where n is the number of input points
turned on simultaneously)
D DO: Total maximum load current for the DOs (including
an instantaneous value) + 10 mA provided that the
maximum is 4 A (for IO card D) or 6 A (for IO card E).
44
5. CONNECTION OF INPUT
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE POWER SUPPLY
CP1 (AMP)
1 +24V
J30
Â
2 0V +24VDC stabilized power source
3
24V10% DC
 FG
 (Note 1)
AMP Japan
1–178288–3 (Housing)
1–175218–5 (Contact)
Class 3 grounding
Standard
A02B–0120–K324
CP1
1 24V10% DC
+24V Momentary case
is included
0V 2 0V
NOTE
1 Be sure to connect the frame ground.
2 When a momentary power failure occurs, the system is
restored to the same state as the state at power–on. To
determine whether a momentary power failure occurred,
see the description of the momentary power failure decision
signal ACT (II–24).
45
5. CONNECTION OF INPUT
POWER SUPPLY HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
FG terminals
(Faston terminals at
the controller)
To the other grounded plates
See the note below. Distribution
switchboard
in the cabinet
External distribution
switchboard
Class 3 grounding or
more strict grounding
46
5. CONNECTION OF INPUT
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE POWER SUPPLY
5.3
POWER TURN–ON 1) Servo amplifier and main unit power supplies
SEQUENCE
24 VDC power 0 ms
for main unit or more
Turn on the 200 VAC servo amplifier power supply before the 24
VDC main unit power supply. Otherwise, a servo alarm numbered
anywhere between 400 and 499 may be issued.
2) 24 VDC power supply
D Main unit, CRT, PDP, and LCD power supplies
Normally turn on the power for the CRT/MDI unit before or, at
latest,simultaneously when the power for Power Mate–C control unit
is turned on. (This is not applied when the CRT/MDI unit is made
detachable.)
200ms or less
If the power for the CRT/MDI unit is turned on after the power for
Power Mate body is turned on, it becomes impossible to execute
special operations while the power for Power Mate is on such as
memory all clear.
D Main unit and I/O power supplies
Turn on the 24 VDC I/O power supply before the 24 VDC main unit
power supply. (The maximum allowable time lag is 500 ms.)
47
5. CONNECTION OF INPUT
POWER SUPPLY HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
Turn on the 24 VDC I/O Link slave power supply before the 24 VDC
I/O Link master power supply. (The maximum allowable time lag is
500 ms.)
Do not disconnect the battery for memory backup (3 VDC) or the
battery for the absolute pulse coders (6 VDC) regardless of whether
the power to the control unit is on or off. If batteries are disconnected
when the power to the control unit is turned off, current data stored
in the control unit for the pulse coders, parameters, programs etc, are
lost.
Make sure that the power to the control unit is on when replacing
batteries.
See Subsec. 3.7.2 for how to replace the batteries for memory backup.
48
5. CONNECTION OF INPUT
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE POWER SUPPLY
5.5 The Power Mate controller has a circuit for protection against momentary
power failures.
MOMENTARY
When a momentary power failure is detected, the Power Mate controller
POWER FAILURE turns off the output signals to the servo system and machine. Upon
recovery from the momentary power failure, the system is automatically
reset to turn on the output signals to the servo system and machine. Then
the Power Mate waits for automatic operation to be restarted. (The
operator restarts operation after checking the status.)
The signal ACT on the PMC is available to check if a momentary power
failure has occurred (See II–24).
49
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
50
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
6.1 The Power Mate can be combined with the units shown in the table below
as I/O units for the machine interface.
GENERAL The I/O units can be classified into two types: the I/O units tailored to the
FANUC I/O Link, and the built-in I/O unit. The I/O units for the FANUC
I/O Link are installed separately from the control unit, and connected with
the control unit using the dedicated serial FANUC I/O Link.
As shown in the figure below, two or more units can be installed
separately.
The FANUC I/O Unit-MODEL A is a modular-type I/O unit. It selects
necessary modules from various I/O modules provided by FANUC
according to the application and uses them as one external unit. The
FANUC I/O Link transfers data between the control unit and such an
external unit at a high speed. The states of the input signals from the
machine are transferred to the control unit at regular intervals. The states
of the output signals from the control unit are transferred to external units
at regular intervals.
The built-in I/O unit are two types. One is a built-in I/O card to be inserted
into the control unit. Another is an internal I/O to be inserted into base
P.C. board. Internal I/O and built–in I/O can not use together.
The built–in I/O card or internal I/O can be used together with an I/O unit
for the FANUC I/O Link.
I/O card E
(DI:96 DO:64)
CAUTION
To turn off the power to the motor, input the emergency stop
signal to both the CNC control unit and servo system
simultaneously. For details of applying the emergency stop
signal to the servo system, refer to FANUC CONTROL
MOTOR AMPLIFIER series DESCRIPTIONS (B–65162E).
51
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
6.2
CONNECTION OF
THE FANUC I/O Link
6.2.1 In FANUC I/O Link (omit as I/O Link) there are the master station and
General its slave stations. The master is the Controller of the Power Mate or
others, and the slaves are the I/O unit and I/O card. Power Mate can be
used as slave. The slaves are divided into groups, and up to 16 groups can
be connected to one I/O Link. A maximum of two base I/O units can be
connected as a group. I/O card is counted as one group.
The two connectors of the I/O link are named JD1A and JD1B, and are
common to all units (that have I/O Link function). A cable is always
connected from JD1A of a unit to JD1B of the next unit. Although JD1B
of the last unit is not used and left open, it need not be connected with a
terminator. Power Mate uses JD1A1 to connect I/O card etc... as a master,
and uses JD1A and JD1B to be slave controller of other CNC controller.
The pin assignments of connectors JD1A and JD1B are common to all
units on the I/O Link, and are illustrated on the next page. Use the figures
when connecting the I/O Link irrespective of the type of unit.
An I/O unit for the I/O Link can be used together with a built–in I/O. Bit
3 (BIO) of parameter No. 3001 can be used to determine whether to enter
the emergency stop/high–speed interlock/skip/reference position return
deceleration signal through an I/O unit for the I/O Link or built–in I/O.
JD1B
JD1A
JD1B
JD1A
Max. 16
group
JD1B Machine
JD1A operator’s
Group I/O card panel
#3
52
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
6.2.2
Connection of FANUC
I/O Link by Electric Control unit or preceding
slave unit
Cable
JD1A, JD1A1 JD1B
(PCR–EV20MDT) (PCR–E20LMD) JD1A
(PCR–E20LMD)
1 SIN 11 0V JD1B 1 SIN 11 0V
2 *SIN 12 0V 2 *SIN 12 0V
3 SOUT 13 0V 3 SOUT 13 0V Next
4 14 0V 4 14 0V
*SOUT *SOUT slave
5 15 5 15
6 16 16
unit
6
7 17 J22 7 17
8 18 (+5V) 8 18 (+5V)
9 (+5V) 19 9 (+5V) 19
10 20 (+5V) 10 20 (+5V)
+5 V terminals are for an optical I/O link adapter. They are not necessary
when connecting with a metal cable.
CAUTION
Do not connect the +5V terminal when the Optical I/O Link
Adapter is not used.
Otherwise, the +5V terminal will be short–circuited, thus
damaging the unit.
1 3
SIN SOUT
2 4
*SIN *SOUT
3 1
SOUT SIN
4 2
*SOUT *SIN
11 11
0V 0V
12 12
0V 0V
13 13
0V 0V
14 14
0V 0V
Shield
NOTE
The wires of the pins (1,2) are connected to the pins (3,4),
and vice versa.
53
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
6.2.3 The FANUC I/O Link can be extended to the maximum length of 200 m
Connection of FANUC with optical fiber cables using an optical I/O link adapter.
I/O Link Optical Fiber NOTE
Cable In the following cases, use an optical fiber cable.
D When the cable length is 3m.
D When the cable runs between different cabinets and it is
impossible to connect the cabinets with a grounding wire
of 5.5 mm2 or thicker.
D When there is concern that the cable is influenced by
strong noise; for example :
When there is a strong electromagnetic noise source
beside the cable such as a welding machine.
When a noise generating cable such as a power cable
runs fora long distance in parallel with the cable.
External dimension of
optical I/O link adapter
66.0
connector for unit
connecting JD1 40.0 4–M3
Optical connector
COP1
45.0
FANUC
7.0
18.0
Weight of optical I/O link Main body : Approx. 100 g.
adapter
Connection
D Connection diagram
Unit Unit
JD1 JD1
JD1A JD1B
COP1
Connecting COP1 Optical Connecting
cable between cable cable between
unit Optical I/O Optical I/O unit
link adapter link adapter
54
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
D Interunit connecting
cables
NOTE
Cross the cables for pins 1 and 2 as well as those for pins
3 and 4.
Installation conditions D The optical I/O link adapter enclosure is not fully sealed ; install it
with the Power Mate control unit in the fully enclosed cabinet.
D Ground the case using the case fixing screw of the optical I/O link
adapter.
D The optical I/O link adapter is light, and it may not be necessary to
mount it with screws. However, keep it from coming in contact
with other circuits to prevent possible short–circuits. When
mounting the optical I/O link adapter in a cabinet, attach it with an
L–type fitting using the case fixing screws (M3) of the optical I/O
link adapter.
L fitting
55
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
Required parts For making up an I/O link using the optical link adapter, the following
parts are necessary:
D Optical I/O link adapter 2
D Interunit connecting cable 2
D Optical cable 1
56
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
6.3.1
Structure of I/O Unit Base Unit ABU05A(5 slots) or ABU10A(10 slots)
I/F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
6.3.2
Outer Dimensions
A (80) 142
130
90
B
20
ø5 (mounting hole)
A B
For 5–slot base unit (ABU05A) 253 238
For 10–slot base unit (ABU10A) 430 415
57
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
6.3.3 Interface modules and various types of I/O modules can be mounted to
Mounting and and dismounted from the base unit easily as shown below.
Dismounting Modules
Mounting
1 Hang the hook at the top of the module on the groove in the upper side
of the base unit.
2 Make the connector of the module engage with that of the base unit.
3 Push the module in the lower groove of the base unit till the stopper
in the lower side of the module stops.
Dismounting
1 Release the stopper by pushing the lever at the bottom of the module.
2 Push the module upwards.
58
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
6.3.4
Connection Diagram
Power Mate
control unit
JD1A
Terminator TX
JD1B
JD1A JD3
JD2 JD2
CP32 PC32
24VDC 24VDC
K2X
K1X
AIF01A AIF01B
JD1B
JD1A JD3
JD2 JD2
JD1B
JD1A JD3
JD2 JD2
CP32 PC32
24VDC 24VDC
K2X
NOTE
1 Number of I/O Units and connecting method are restricted
depending on the allocation of the I/O points.
See 6.2 “Connection of FANUC I/O Link” and 6.3.11
”Number of I/O points for the I/O Unit–A”.
2 Cable K1X can be an optical fiber cable by using the optical
I/O link adapter.
Refer to item 6.2.3.
59
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
6.3.5 Connect the following power source to the connector CP32 of the
Connecting Input interface module (AIF01A or AIF01B).
Power Source D Voltage : 24VDC±10%
D Current : Determine from Table 6.3.6.
AIF01A/AIF01B
CP32
1 +24V
2 GND 24VDC
3
NOTE
Turn ON the power for the I/O unit just before or when the
power for the CNC is turned ON. When the CNC power is
turned OFF, make sure to turn the power to the I/O unit OFF
as well.
ON
Power for the
CNC device OFF
60
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
6.3.6 D Ground the base unit (ABU05A, ABU10A) by its grounding terminal
Grouding
Base unit (ABU05A, ABU10A)
M4 Screw
terminal
D When the cable K1X (see connection diagram in Subsec. 6.3.4) runs
between different cabinets, make sure to connect the cabinets with a
grounding wire more than 5.5 mm2.
n : Number of the input and output points (for each module) which turn
ON simultaneously
D The current sum requirement for modules used in Column A should
not exceed 500 mA.
D The current sum requirement for modules used in Column B should
not exceed 1500 mA.
61
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
6.3.7 Details of the cables K1X, K2X and the terminator shown in the general
Connecting Signal connection diagram are as follows.
Cables
Cable K1X
Cable connection
JD1A JD1B
JD1A1
SIN (1) (3) SOUT
SIN (2) (4) *SOUT
SOUT (3) (1) SIN
SOUT (4) (2) *SIN
0V (11) (11) 0V
0V (12) (12) 0V
0V (13) (13) 0V
0V (14) (14) 0V
D Use twisted pair wires for signal SIN and *SIN, and signals SOUT
and *SOUT.
D Recommended cable material : A66L–0001–0284#10P
(twisted pair/shielded)
D Shielding wires should be connected with the grounding plate of the
cabinet at the JD1A side using a cable clamp.
D Maximum cable length: 10 m
D Do not make any wire connections to the connector spare pins.
(See Subsec. 6.2.2)
D Use an optical I/O link adapter and an optical fiber cable, [in the
following cases] :
- When the cable is more than 10 meters long.
- When the cable runs between different cabinets and there is no
appropriate ground wire between the cabinets.
- When there is concern that the cable is influenced by strong noise.
62
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
Cable K2X
Cable connection
JD2 JD3
S1(1) (1)S1
*S1(2) (2)*S1
S2(3) (3)S2
*S2(4) (4)*S2
S3(5) (5)S3
*S3(6) (6)*S3
S4(7) (7)S4
*S4(8) (8)*S4
S5(11) (11)S5
*S5(12) (12)*S5
S6(13) (13)S6
*S6(14) (14)*S6
ID1(9) (9)ID1
ID2(17) (17)ID2
ID3(18) (18)ID3
0V(15) (15)0V
0V(16) (16)0V
63
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
Terminator TX
AIF01B
Connector
JD2 HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.
PCR–E20FS
1 11 Case : PCR–V20LA
2 12 TRM2
3 13
4 TRM1 14 TRM3
5 15
(a) Terminate the connector
6 16
7 17 JD2 of the last AIF01B in
8 18 a single group with the terminator.
9 19 TRM2
(b) Short–circuit the TRM1 signals
10 TRM1 20 TRM3
as shown. Repeat the shorting
procedure for signals TRM2
and TRM3.
Cable connection
JD2
TRM1 (4)
TRM1 (10)
TRM2 (12)
TRM2 (19)
TRM3 (14)
TRM3 (20)
64
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
6.3.8 For an external connecting method, there are two types of I/O modules :
Connecting with I/O one with a terminal block, and one with a connector.
The terminal block is a removable type.
Modules
Input/Output
display LED
A0 . . .7
B0 . . .7 Terminal
block cover
Connector
HONDA
TSUSHIN
KOGYO
CO., LTD.
MR–50RMA
Dismounting the
terminal block
65
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
A : Approx. 4.5mm
6.3.9
Digital Input/Output
Module
Digital input modules
Input Module Rated Rated Response External LED
Polarity Points
type name voltage current time connection display
Maximum
AID32A 24VDC 7.5mA Both 32 Connector not provided
Non–insulation 20ms
DC input Maximum
AID32B 24VDC 7.5mA Both 32 Connector not provided
2ms
Maximum
AID16C 24VDC 7.5mA NEG 16 Terminal block provided
20ms
Maximum
AID16D 24VDC 7.5mA POS 16 Terminal block provided
Insulation type
y 20ms
DC input Maximum
AID32E 24VDC 7.5mA Both 32 Connector not provided
20ms
Maximum
AID32F 24VDC 7.5mA Both 32 Connector not provided
2ms
10.5mA ON Max 35ms
AC input AIA16G 100–120VAC 16 Terminal block provided
(120VAC) OFF Max 45ms
NOTE
1 Polarity
Negative : 0 V common (current source type)
– The input is defined as ON when at a low level
Positive : 24 V common (current sink type)
– The input is defined as ON when at a high level
2 For the details of the specifications for each module, refer
to FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A Connection⋅Maintenance
Manual (B–61813E).
66
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
NOTE
1 Polarity
Negative : 0 V common (current sink type)
– Output is at low level when ON.
Positive : 24 V common (current source type)
– Output is at high level when ON.
2 For the details of the specifications for each module, refer
to FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A Connection⋅Maintenance
Manual (B–61813E).
67
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
6.3.10
Correspondence
Bit
between I/O Signals
Address in the
and Addresses in a module
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Module Module of 8
0 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 points
Module of 16
points
1 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
2 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
Module of
32 points
3 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
68
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
6.3.11 Determine the number of I/O points for the I/O Unit –MODEL A using
Number of Points for the following.
I/O Unit–MODEL A
D Output points
Sum of the actual output Occupied output points
points in a group
0 to 32 → 32 points
40 to 64 → 64 points
72 to 128 → 128 points
136 to 256 → 256 points
(Note) Count AOA05E as 8 points and AOA12F as 16 points.
D Input points
Sum of the actual input Occupied input points
points in a group
0 to 32 → 32 points
40 to 64 → 64 points
72 to 128 → 128 points
136 to 256 → 256 points
As a result of the calculation above, when the number of input points is
smaller than that of the output points in a single group, the number of
input points is assumed to be equal to that of the output points.
Example 1:
When the following modules are used in the group No. 0
AOD32C 3
AOA12F 2
AID32A 5
AIA16G 3
[Input points]
32×5+16×3 = 208 → 256 points
[Output points]
32×3+16×2 = 128 → 128 points
Example 2:
When the following modules are used in the group No. 2.
AOD16C 7
AOA05F 9
AID16A 4
AIA16G 3
[Input points]
16×4+16×3 = 112 → 128 points
[Output points]
16×7+8×9 = 184 → 256 points
In this case, as the number of input points is smaller than that of the
output points, the number of input points is assumedl to be equal to
that of the output points, in other words, 256 points.
69
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
6.4
INPUT/OUTPUT
SIGNAL
SPECIFICATIONS
6.4.1
Input signal 1) DC input signal A
DC input signal A is a category of signals sent from machine
specifications components (such as pushbutton, limit switch, relay contact) to the
Power Mate.
2) DC input signal B
DC input signal B is a category of signals sent from the machine to
the Power Mate for high–speed operation.
This category uses a noninsulated interface in which the signals can
be switched between a sink type (0 V common) and a source type (24
V common). However, the emergency stop input is fixed to a sink
type (0 V common). In addition, safety standards require the sink
type be used.
Both DC input signals A and B should satisfy the following
conditions for contacts on the machine side
Contact capacity:
30 VDC, 16 mA or greater
Open–circuit contact–to–contact leakage:
1 mA or less (for 26.4 V)
Closed–circuit contact–to–contact voltage drop:
2 V or less (for 8.5 mA, including a voltage drop across
the cable)
Logical 1
DC input ON (contact closed)
signal
Logical 0
OFF (contact opened)
Receiver
output signal
DC input signal A 5 to 22 ms 5 to 22 ms
DC input signal B Up to 2 ms Up to 2 ms
NOTE
DC input signal B can be used under the following input
conditions:
Closed–circuit contact–to–contact voltage drop:
3.5 V or less (for 8.5 mA, including a voltage drop across
the cable)
Receiver delay time: 4 ms maximum
70
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
Power Mate
3.3KW
DIC
Open: Logical 0
Closed: Logical 1
+24V
+24V
0V
Power Mate
3.3KW
DIC
Open: Logical 1
Closed: Logical 0
+24V
+24V
0V
WARNING
When a 0V common (source) interface is used, a ground
fault in an input signal has the same effect as closing the
contacts. From the viewpoint of safety, therefore, FANUC
does not recommend the use of such an interface for input
signals.
71
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
6.4.2 The Power Mate uses source–type output signals that comply with safety
Output Signal standards.
Specifications The output signals are rated as follows:
Supply voltage:
+24 V 10% (including an instantaneous value)
Supply current:
At least the total maximum load current (including an
instantaneous value) + 100 mA
Turn–on timing:
Before the Power Mate power supply is turned on (with a
maximum allowable time lag of 500 ms)
Turn–off timing: Same time or after the Power Mate power
supply is turned off
Connect the power supply that meets the above requirements to the output
signal power supply pins (DOC and 0V) of each DI/DO connector. Note
that the total load current varies with the type of a DI/DO card used. It
is necessary to connect 24 VDC to all DOC pins.
I/O card D: Maximum load current of 4.0 A
I/O card E: Maximum load current of 6.0 A
Built–in I/O card: Maximum load current of 2.1 A
Internal I/O: Maximum load current of 0.5 A
NOTE
1 For internal I/O units, it is unnecessary to connect an
external 24 VDC power supply.
2 Use 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) or heavier wire as the power cable.
72
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
Output signal driver The output signal driver can output up to eight signals.
The driver element monitors the current of each output signal. If an
overcurrent is detected, the output of that signal is turned off. Once a
signal has been turned off, the overcurrent will no longer exist, such that
the driver turns the signal on again. Therefore, in the case of a ground fault
or overload, the output of a signal will be repeatedly turned on and off.
This also occurs when a load which causes a high surge current is
connected.
The driver element contains an overheat detector, which turns off all eight
output signals if the temperature in the device exceeds the set value as a
result of an overcurrent caused by a ground fault or some other failure.
This off state is held. To restore signal output, logically turn the output
off then back on again, for each signal, after the temperature falls below
the set value. Signal output can also be restored by turning the system
power off then back on again.
If the output of a signal cannot be turned on even though the CNC
diagnostic indicates that the signal is on, that signal or another signal
being handled by the same element may be overloaded, thus causing the
eight output signals to be turned off. In such a case, turn the system power
off and eliminate the cause of the overload.
DOC
OHD
CONTROL
IN#0 LOGIC
OUT#0
OCD
CONTROL
IN#1 LOGIC
OUT#1
OCD
CONTROL
IN#7 LOGIC
OUT#7
OCD
73
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
Power Mate
Source–type
driver circuit
Regulated
DOC power supply
|
+24V 0V
0V
Power Mate
DOC Regulated
power supply
+24V 0V
Source–type
driver circuit
Dim–light
resistance
Lamp
Leakage prevention
diode
0V
74
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
6.5 The I/O card (D, E) is connected to the Power Mate through the FANUC
I/O Link and is used for interfacing with the machine. The DO is of source
CONNECTION OF type conforming to the safety requirements.
I/O CARD D/E There are two cards available depending on the number of I/O points.
DO maximum
I/O card Specification Input Output
load currrent
I/O card E A16B-2202–0732 96 points 64 points 6A
I/O card D A16B-2202–0733 48 points 32 points 4A
Power Mate
control unit
J22 J22
JD1B JD1A To next device
JD1A1
If there is no equipment
beyond this I/O card,
JD1A can remain open.
CM52 J89
FCI
3P CONNECTOR J90
(Brown) CMB3
Housing : SMS3PNS-5 J91 Machine
Contact : RC16M-SCT3 CMB4
1 +24V
2 GND Cable side
3 Female connector
D For power cable J24, use a wire of at least 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2).
D For information about the connection between the control unit and
I/O card, see Subsec. 6.2.2.
D To connect with the machine, use a multi–core shielded cable.
Recommended cables:
A66L–0001–0041 (70/0.18, 20 conductors)
A66L–0001–0042 (70/0.18, 50 conductors)
D Clamp the cable with the cable clamp on the grounding plate of the
cabinet on the I/O card side.
D For details of the signal specifications, see Section 6.4.
D CM51, CM52, CMB3
50–pin female connector manufactured by Honda Tsushin
Solder type: A02B–0029–K891 (MR–50LFH)
Crimp type: A02B–0029–K893 (MRP–50F01, MR–50L,
MRP–F112, 50 pins)
75
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
D CMB4
20–pin female connector manufactured by Honda Tsushin
Solder type: A02B–0029–K899 (MR–20LFH)
Crimp type: A02B–0029–K901 (MRP–20F01, MR–20L,
MRP–F112, 20 pins)
D The frame ground of this I/O card can be connected by mounting
the metal fitting to the cabinet.
76
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
6.5.1
Connector Layout for
I/O Card
CM51
1 DI00 33 DIC1
2 DI03 34 DI02 Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
19 DI01
3 DI06 35 DI05
20 DI04 Xn DI07 DI06 DI05 DI04 DI03 DI02 DI01 DI00
4 DI11 36 DI10
21 DI07
5 DI14 37 DI13 DI17 DI16 DI15 DI14 DI13 DI12 DI11 DI10
22 DI12 Xn+1
6 DI17 38 DI16
23 DI15
7 DI22 39 DI21 Xn+2 DI27 DI26 DI25 DI24 DI23 DI22 DI21 DI20
24 DI20
8 DI25 40 DI24
25 DI23 DI37 DI36 DI35 DI34 DI33 DI32 DI31 DI30
9 DI27 41 DI26 Xn+3
26 DI30
10 DI32 42 DI31
27 DI33 Xn+4 DI47 DI46 DI45 DI44 DI43 DI42 DI41 DI40
11 DI35 43 DI34
28 DI36
12 DI40 44 DI37 DI57 DI56 DI55 DI54 DI53 DI52 DI51 DI50
29 DI41 Xn+5
13 DI43 45 DI42
30 DI44
14 DI46 46 DI45
31 DI47
15 DI51 47 DI50
32 DI52
16 DI54 48 DI53 Switchable–common DC input signal B;
17 DI56 49 DI55 12 points switched by DIC1
18 +24E 50 DI57
Switchable–common DC input signal A, 8
points switched by DIC2
NOTE
Addresses can be 0 to 127.
48 points (DI00 to DI57) can be used for the A16B–2202–0733. Without connector CM52.
77
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
CMB3
1 DO00 33 0V
2 DO03 34 DO02 Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
19 DO01
3 DO06 35 DO05
20 DO04 Yn DO07 DO06 DO05 DO04 DO03 DO02 DO01 DO00
4 DO11 36 DO10
21 DO07
5 DO14 37 DO13
22 DO12 Yn+1 DO17 DO16 DO15 DO14 DO13 DO12 DO11 DO10
6 DO17 38 DO16
23 DO15
7 DO22 39 DO21 Yn+2 DO27 DO26 DO25 DO24 DO23 DO22 DO21 DO20
24 DO20
8 DO25 40 DO24
25 DO23
9 DO27 41 DO26 Yn+3 DO37 DO36 DO35 DO34 DO33 DO32 DO31 DO30
26 DO30
10 DO32 42 DO31
27 DO33 Yn+4 DO47 DO46 DO45 DO44 DO43 DO42 DO41 DO40
11 DO35 43 DO34
28 DO36
12 DO40 44 DO37
29 DO41 Yn+5 DO57 DO56 DO55 DO54 DO53 DO52 DO51 DO50
13 DO43 45 DO42
30 DO44
14 DO46 46 DO45
31 DO47
15 DO51 47 DO50
32 DO52
16 DO54 48 DO53
17 DOC 9 DO55
18 DIC2 50 DOC
CMB4
1 DO61 14 DO60
8 DO62
2 DO64 15 DO63 Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
9 DO65
3 DO67 16 DO66
10 DO70 Yn+6 DO67 DO66 DO65 DO64 DO63 DO62 DO61 DO60
4 DO72 17 DO71
11 DO73
5 DO75 18 DO74 Yn+7 DO77 DO76 DO75 DO74 DO73 DO72 DO71 DO70
12 DO76
6 DO56 19 DO77
13 DO57
7 0V 20 DOC
NOTE
Addresses can be 0 to 127.
32 points (DO00 to DO37) can be used for the A16B–2202–0733. Without connector CMB4.
78
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
6.5.2
Details of DI
connection
Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E
DI01 CM51(19) Xn . 1
DI02 CM51(34) Xn . 2
DI03 CM51(02) Xn . 3
DI04 CM51(20) Xn . 4
DI05 CM51(35) Xn . 5
DI06 CM51(03) Xn . 6
DI07 CM51(21) Xn . 7
DIC1 CM51(33)
79
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E
DIC1 CM51(33)
80
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E
81
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E
82
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E
DIC2 CMB3(18)
83
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E
84
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E
85
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E
86
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E
87
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E
88
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E
89
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E
DIC1 CM51(33)
90
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
6.5.3
Details of DO
connection
Power Mate
Yn .0
CMB3(01) DO00
Yn .1 CMB3(19) DO01
Yn .2 CMB3(34) DO02
Yn .3 CMB3(02) DO03
Yn .4 CMB3(20) DO04
Yn .5 CMB3(35) DO05
Yn .6 CMB3(03) DO06
Yn .7 CMB3(21) DO07
91
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
Power Mate
Yn+1. 0
CMB3(36) DO10
92
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
Power Mate
Yn+2. 0
CMB3(24) DO20
93
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
Power Mate
Yn+3. 0
CMB3(26) DO30
94
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
Power Mate
Yn+4. 0
CMB3(12) DO40
95
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
Power Mate
Yn+5. 0
CMB3(47) DO50
96
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
Power Mate
Yn+6. 0
CMB4(14) DO60
97
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
Power Mate
Yn+7. 0
CMB4(10) DO70
98
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
6.5.4
Dimensions of I/O Card
Approx.100mm
The following LEDs, fuses, variable resistors, and setting pins are
mounted on the PCB:
[LEDs]
DB2 (green, pilot) : Lights while the power to the PCB is on.
DB1 (red, alarm) : Lights if an error occurs in the PCB or CNC.
DAL1 to DAL8 : Do driver at overheat
[Fuses]
FU1 (3.2 A) : Used for external 24–V input.
(Order number A02B–0120–K104)
FU2 (5.0 A) : Used for +5 V on the PCB.
(Order number A02B–0200–K103)
[Variable resistors]
VR1 and VR2 : Factory–set by FANUC. The machine tool builder
need not adjust these resistors.
[Setting pin]
CP1 : Used to specify whether the CNC will be notified of
a DO signal error as a system alarm.
99
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
6.6
CONNECTION OF
BUIL–IN I/O CARD C
6.6.1
Outline
DI 32 pins
DO 24 pins
100
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
To P.C.B.
Prevent key
Upper
side Pin mark
101
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
6.6.2
Signals (1) DI signals
PMC
ADDRESS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1000 SKIP *RILK *ESP SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1001
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1002 *DEC6 *DEC5 *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1003
(2) DO signals
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1000
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1002
102
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
6.6.3
Machine interface
A B A B
01 +24E +24E 01 +24E +24E
02 X1000.0 X1000.1 02 X1002.0 X1002.1
03 X1000.2 X1000.3 03 X1002.2 X1002.3
04 X1000.4 X1000.5 04 X1002.4 X1002.5
05 DIC X1000.7 05 X1002.6 X1002.7
06 X1000.6 DOC 06 DOC DOC
07 X1001.0 X1001.1 07 X1003.0 X1003.1
08 X1001.2 X1001.3 08 X1003.2 X1003.3
09 X1001.4 X1001.5 09 X1003.4 X1003.5
10 X1001.6 X1001.7 10 X1003.6 X1003.7
11 Y1000.0 Y1000.1 11 Y1002.0 Y1002.1
12 Y1000.2 Y1000.3 12 Y1002.2 Y1002.3
13 Y1000.4 Y1000.5 13 Y1002.4 Y1002.5
14 Y1000.6 Y1000.7 14 Y1002.6 Y1002.7
15 Y1001.0 Y1001.1 15 Y1001.4 Y1001.5
16 Y1001.2 Y1001.3 16 Y1001.6 Y1001.7
17 0V 0V 17 0V 0V
Female Female
J86 J87
NOTE
1 +24E (output)
A voltage of 24 VDC supplied to the Power Mate main unit
is connected through a fuse and used for DI signals. Do not
connect an external 24 VDC output to this pin. Do not
connect it to DOC either.
2 DOC (external 24 VDC input)
An external voltage of 24 VDC should be supplied for DO
signals.
103
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
6.6.4
Details of DI
connection
Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E
CB128(B02) X1000. 1
CB128(A03) X1000. 2
CB128(B03) X1000. 3
CB128(A04) X1000. 4
CB128(B04) X1000. 5
CB128(A06) X1000. 6
CB128(B05) X1000. 7
DIC CB128(A05)
0V CB128(A17)
104
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E
CB128(B07) X1001. 1
CB128(A08) X1001. 2
CB128(B08) X1001. 3
CB128(A09) X1001. 4
CB128(B09) X1001. 5
CB128(A10) X1001. 6
CB128(B10) X1001. 7
DIC CB128(A05)
0V CB128(A17)
105
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E
CB129(B02) X1002. 1
CB129(A03) X1002. 2
CB129(B03) X1002. 3
CB129(A04) X1002. 4
CB129(B04) X1002. 5
CB129(A05) X1002. 6
CB129(B05) X1002. 7
106
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E
CB129(B07) X1003. 1
CB129(A08) X1003. 2
CB129(B08) X1003. 3
CB129(A09) X1003. 4
CB129(B09) X1003. 5
CB129(A10) X1003. 6
CB129(B10) X1003. 7
107
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
6.6.5
Details of DO
connection
Power Mate
Y1000. 0
CB128(A11)
Y1000. 1 CB128(B11)
Y1000. 2 CB128(A12)
Y1000. 3 CB128(B12)
Y1000. 4 CB128(A13)
Y1000. 5 CB128(B13)
Y1000. 6 CB128(A14)
Y1000. 7 CB128(B14)
108
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
Power Mate
Y1001. 0
CB128(A15)
Y1001. 1 CB128(B15)
Y1001. 2 CB128(A16)
Y1001. 3 CB128(B16)
Y1001. 4 CB129(A15)
Y1001. 5 CB129(B15)
Y1001. 6 CB129(A16)
Y1001. 7 CB129(B16)
109
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
Power Mate
Y1002. 0
CB129(A11)
Y1002. 1 CB129(B11)
Y1002. 2 CB129(A12)
Y1002. 3 CB129(B12)
Y1002. 4 CB129(A13)
Y1002. 5 CB129(B13)
Y1002. 6 CB129(A14)
Y1002. 7 CB129(B14)
110
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
6.7
CONNECTION TO
INTERNAL I/O UNITS
(HIGH–SPEED DI
SIGNAL INTERFACE)
(2) DO signals
PMC
ADDRESS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1000
6.7.3
Machine interface
Power Mate–H
JE1 (PCR–EV20MDT)
1 X1000.0 11 DIC
2 X1000.1 12 0V
3 X1000.2 13 HDI Power magnetics cabinet and
machine operator’s panel
4 X1000.3 14 0V
5 X1000.4 15 Y1000.0
6 X1000.5 16 0V
NOTE) +24E (output)
7 X1000.6 17 Y1000.1
8 X1000.7 18 Y1000.2 A voltage of 24 VDC supplied to the Power Mate–H
main unit is connected through a fuse and used for
9 19 +24E DI signals. Do not connect an external 24 VDC
10 +24E 20 Y1000.3 output to this pin.
NOTE) HDI (JE1–13)
Input pin for high–speed DI signal
111
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
6.7.4
Details of DI
connection
Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E
Skip 3
signal SKIP3 JE1(02) X1000. 1
Skip 4
signal SKIP4 JE1(03) X1000. 2
JE1(04) X1000. 3
Emergency
stop signal
input *ESP JE1(05) X1000. 4
JE1(06) X1000. 5
High–speed
interlock
signal *RILK JE1(07) X1000. 6
Skip
signal SKIP JE1(08) X1000. 7
DIC JEI(11)
0V JE1(12)
112
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
HDI JE1(13)
0V JE1(14)
Shield
NC
Driver Receiver
VH/VL
lih/lil
Shield
113
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
NOTE
1 A positive Iih/Iil indicates that current is flowing into the
receiver, while a negative Iih/Iil indicates that current is
flowing out of the receiver.
2 A high–speed DI signal is assumed to be 1 when the input
voltage is low and 0 when the input voltage is high.
6.7.6
Details of DO Signals
Power Mate
Y1000.0
JE1(15)
Y1000.1 JE1(17)
Y1000. 2 JE1(18)
Y1000. 3 JE1(20)
JE1(14, 16) 0V
114
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
115
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
6.10
CONNECTION USING
GENIUS
6.10.1 The Power Mate–H can be connected to PLC via the Genius interface.
Overview
PLC
Genius
6.10.2
Specifications (1) Up to 32 stations can be connected.
(2) Via the Genius interface, 32–byte DI data and 32–byte DO data are
transferred.
(3) The user can choose from the transfer rates 38.4 K baud, 76.8 K baud,
and 153.6 K baud.The allowable transfer distances are:
38.4 K baud: Up to 2250 m (In this case, no more than 16 stations can
be connected.)
76.8 K baud: Up to 1350 m
153.6 K baud: Up to 600 m
(4) The Genius card is required for the Power Mate to use the Genius
interface.
The Genius card is a sub–printed circuit board of the Power Mate, and
built into the control unit.
(5) The Genius card has 16 internal DI points (DC input signal B) and 2
internal DO points (source–type).
For the input signal specifications and output signal specifications,
see Section 6.4.1 and Section 6.4.2.
The maximum load current of a source–type output signal is 1.4 A.
(6) Restrictions on using the Genius card
D The FANUC I/O Link slave function cannot be used.
D The other sub–printed circuit boards (such as the built–in I/O
card, FANUC I/O Link–II card, M–NET card, and Profibus card)
cannot be used.
116
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
6.10.3
Connection
Genius Genius
pre–stage post–stage
Power Mate
CD36
6.10.4
Signals 1) Genius interface
D DI signals: X1032 to X1063 (256 points)
D DO signals: Y1032 to Y1063 (256 points)
2) Built–in I/O
D DI signals (16 points)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1000 SKIP *RILK *ESP SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2
CE49–
B05 A06 B04 A04 B03 A03 B02 A02
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1002 *DEC6 *DEC5 *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1
CE49–
B10 A10 B09 A09 B08 A08 B07 A07
NOTE
To use the above functions (*ESP, *RILK, SKIPn, and
*DECn), set bit 3 (BIO) of parameter No. 3001 and
parameter No. 3005.
X1001, X1003 to X1031, and X1064 and up cannot be
used.
D DO signals (2 points)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1000
CE49–
B11 A11
117
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
NOTE
Y1000.2 to Y1002.7, Y1001 to Y1031, and Y1064 and up
cannot be used.
6.10.5
Genius Interface
01 X1
02 X2
J140
03 SHD Genius
post–stage
04 ASHD
X1(01) X1(01)
X2(02) X2(02)
SHD(03) SHD(03)
Shield
ASHD(04) ASHD(04)
Genius post–stage
X1(01)
X2(02)
SHD(03)
Shield
ASHD(04)
118
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
Pin number → 1 2 3 4
119
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
6.10.6
Mechanical Interface of
Built–in I/O
Genius card
CE49
Connector for a 34–pin ribbon cable
Hirose HIF3BB–34D–2.564R
A B
01 +24E +24E
02 X1000.0 X1000.1
03 X1000.2 X1000.3
04 X1000.4 X1000.5
05 DIC1 X1000.7 J139 Power magnetics
Male Fe- cabinet and
06 X1000.6 DOC machine opera-
male
07 X1002.0 X1002.1 tor’s panel
08 X1002.2 X1002.3
09 X1002.4 X1002.5
10 X1002.6 X1002.7
11 Y1000.0 Y1000.1
12 Clamp the shield of cable J139
13 to the ground plate of the cabi-
net on the Genius card side by
14
using a cable clamp metal.
15 DOC
16 DIC2
17 0V 0V
1 +24E (output)
A voltage of 24 VDC applied to the Power Mate main unit is connected through a fuse and used for DI
signals. Do not connect an external 24 VDC output to this pin. Do not connect it to DOC either.
2 DOC (external 24 VDC input)
An external voltage of 24 VDC for DO signals should be connected to the two DOC pins.
3 DIC1, DIC2 (input)
These pins are used for DI common switching. Usually, connect these pins to 0V.
120
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
6.10.7
Details of DI
Connection
Power Mate
Example of connection
Pin number
+24E
CE49(A02) X1000. 0
CE49(B02) X1000. 1
CE49(A03) X1000. 2
CE49(B03) X1000. 3
CE49(A04) X1000. 4
CE49(B04) X1000. 5
CE49(A06) X1000. 6
CE49(B05) X1000. 7
DIC1
CE49(A05)
0V CE49(A17,B17)
121
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
Power Mate
Example of connection
Pin number
+24E
CE49(A07) X1002. 0
CE49(B07) X1002. 1
CE49(A08) X1002. 2
CE49(B08) X1002. 3
CE49(A09) X1002. 4
CE49(B09) X1002. 5
CE49(A10) X1002. 6
CE49(B10) X1002. 7
DIC2
CE49(A16)
0V CE49(A17,B17)
122
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
6.10.8
Details of DO
Connection
Power Mate
Example of
Pin number connection
Bit number
Address number CE49(B06,B15) DOC Regulated power
supply
+24V 0V
Y1000. 0
CB49(A11)
Y1000. 1 CB49(B11)
CB49(A17,B17) 0V
123
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
124
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
7.1
CRT/MDI UNIT
INTERFACE
(SIMULTANEOUS
BLOCK START
INTERFACE)
ÂÂ
 t t t 0.2 sec
If the power for the CRT/MDI unit is turned on after the power for
Power Mate body is turned on, it becomes impossible to execute
special operations while the power for Power Mate is on such as
memory all clear. (See Subsec. 7.1.8.)
e) To enable the use of a CRT/MDI unit, a CRT control module must be
installed in the Power Mate–H.
WARNING
To have the CRT/MDI approved for the CE marking, it is
necessary to provide a shock hazard prevention cover
(A02B–0200–K820). Attaching the cover to the CRT is the
machine tool builder’s responsibility.
125
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
J45 J48
JD14 JD13 CPD1
#0 JN1 FG DC+24V
(NOTE1) Terminal unit power source
JD15
"10%1.0A
(Stabilized power
(NOTE2) source)
(2) When multiple power Mates share one CRT/MDI Max.16 Power
Mates
J46,J44
Common
Power Mate
JD14 (NOTE 1) Device numbers are set using the
#2 rotary switch RSW. If the same device
(NOTE1) number is used for two or more units,
JD15 the information is not correctly shown
on the CRT/MDI unit.
J46,J44
(NOTE 2) Attach a terminal unit
Power Mate (A02B–0124–D001) to the last Power
Mate.
JD14
(NOTE 3) When two or more Power Mates share
#n (NOTE2) one CRT/MDI unit, specify the number
(NOTE1) Terminal unit of Power Mates connected to the unit
JD15 in parameter No. 3170 Maximum axes
displayed on the common use screen
are 18 axes.
(NOTE 4) To identify each Power Mate, a name
can be given to it. See parameters
No. 3171 to No. 3176.
126
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
7.1.2
CRT Interface (with
Simultaneous Block
Separate type MDI unit
Start) Power Mate CRT/MDI unit
JD14 JD13
(PCR–EV20MDT) (PCR–EV20MDT)
1 RXD 11 0V 1 TXD 11 0V
2 *RXD 12 0V 2 *TXD 12 0V
J43
3 TXD 13 SI1 3 RXD 13 SI1
4 *TXD 14 *SI1 4 *RXD 14 *SI1
5 ITPGA 15 SI2 5 ITPGA 15 SI2
6 *ITPGA 16 *SI2 6 *ITPGA 16 *SI2
7 ITPGB 17 SI3 7 ITPGB 17 SI3
8 *ITPGB 18 *SI3 8 *ITPGB 18 *SI3
9 SI0 19 9 SI0 19
10 20 *SI0 10 20 *SI0
JD14 JD13
1 1
RXD TXD
2 2
*RXD *TXD
3 3
TXD RXD
4 4
*TXD *RXD
5 5
ITPGA ITPGA
6 6
*ITPGA *ITPGA
7 7
ITPGB ITPGB
8 8
*ITPGB *ITPGB
9 9
SI0 SI0
20 20
*SI0 *SI0
13 13
SI1 SI1
14 14
*SI1 *SI1
15 15
SI2 SI2
16 16
*SI2 *SI2
17 17
SI3 SI3
18 18
*SI3 *SI3
11 11
0V 0V
12 12
0V 0V
Shield
127
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
7.1.3
CRT Interface (without
Separate type MDI unit
Simultaneous Block Power Mate CRT/MDI unit
Start)
JD14 JD13
(PCR–EV20MDT) (PCR–EV20MDT)
1 RXD 11 0V 1 TXD 11 0V
2 *RXD 12 0V 2 *TXD 12 0V
J45
3 TXD 13 (SI1) 3 RXD 13 (SI1)
4 *TXD 14 (*SI1) 4 *RXD 14 (*SI1)
5 (ITPGA) 15 (SI2) 5 (ITPGA) 15 (SI2)
6 (*ITPGA) 16 (*SI2) 6 (*ITPGA) 16 (*SI2)
7 (ITPGB) 17 (SI3) 7 (ITPGB) 17 (SI3)
8 (*ITPGB) 18 (*SI3) 8 (*ITPGB) 18 (*SI3)
9 (SI0) 19 9 (SI0) 19
10 20 (*SI0) 10 20 (*SI0)
128
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
7.1.4
Interface Between
Multiple Power Mates
(with Simultaneous Power Mate 2nd Power Mate
Block Start) JD15 JD14
(PCR–EV20MDT) (PCR–EV20MDT)
1 RXD 11 0V 1 RXD 11 0V
2 *RXD 12 0V 2 *RXD 12 0V
J44
3 TXD 13 SI1 3 TXD 13 SI1
4 *TXD 14 *SI1 4 *TXD 14 *SI1
5 ITPGA 15 SI2 5 ITPGA 15 SI2
6 *ITPGA 16 *SI2 6 *ITPGA 16 *SI2
7 ITPGB 17 SI3 7 ITPGB 17 SI3
8 *ITPGB 18 *SI3 8 *ITPGB 18 *SI3
9 SI0 19 9 SO0 19
10 20 *SI0 10 20 *SO0
129
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
7.1.5
Interface between
Multiple Power Mate Power Mate CRT/MDI unit
(without Simultaneous JD15 JD14
Block Start) (PCR–EV20MDT) (PCR–EV20MDT)
1 RXD 11 0V 1 RXD 11 0V
2 *RXD 12 0V 2 *RXD 12 0V
J46
3 TXD 13 (SI1) 3 TXD 13 (SI1)
4 *TXD 14 (*SI1) 4 *TXD 14 (*SI1)
5 (ITPGA) 15 (SI2) 5 (ITPGA) 15 (SI2)
6 (*ITPGA) 16 (*SI2) 6 (*ITPGA) 16 (*SI2)
7 (ITPGB) 17 (SI3) 7 (ITPGB) 17 (SI3)
8 (*ITPGB) 18 (*SI3) 8 (*ITPGB) 18 (*SI3)
9 (SI0) 19 9 (SO0) 19
10 20 (*SI0) 10 20 (*SO0)
130
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
7.1.6
Device Selection
Switch Separate type MDI unit
CRT/MDI unit
JN1
(PCR–EV20MDT)
Machine operator’s panel
1 *SEL0 11 *SEL4
2 0V 12 0V
J47
3 *SEL1 13 *SEL5 Device No. selection switch
4 0V 14 0V
5 *SEL2 15 *SEL6
6 0V 16 0V
7 *SEL3 17 *SEL7
8 0V 18 0V
9 19
10 20
JN1
#0
1 #1
*SEL0 #2
3 #3
*SEL1 #4
5 #5
*SEL2 #6
7 #7
*SEL3 #8
11 #9
*SEL4 #10
13 #11
*SEL5 #12
15 #13
*SEL6 #14
17 #15
*SEL7 common
2,4,6,8,12,14,16,18
0V
When the total length of the CRT link cable is 50 m to 100 m, connect
*SEL5 to 0V.
131
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG10 ten pairs)
Recommended connector
PCR–E20FS or PCR–E20FA
Housing PCR–V20LA
132
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
7.1.7
Power Supply Interface
CRT/MDI unit (Separate type MDI unit)
CPD1
(AMP)
External power source
1 +24V
2 0V
J48
3 +24VDC power source
(Stabilized power source)
AMP Japan
1–178288–3 (Housing)
1–175218–5 (Contact)
CPD1
1
+24V +24VDC10% 1.0A
2
0V 0V
The CRT/MDI unit and separate MDI unit have a frame grounding stud
at the back. The frame should be grounded by connecting this stud using
a 100 to 300 mm stranded wire having a cross–sectional area of 2mm2 or
larger.
7.1.8
Detachable CRT/MDI
Unit 1) The Power Mate–H can be operated without connecting a CRT/MDI
unit.
2) To attach or detach a CRT/MDI unit while the Power Mate–H is
turned on, 0V of the Power Mate–H must be connected to 0V of the
CRT/MDI unit before any other lines.
The shell of connector JD14 on the Power Mate–H controller side is
connected to 0V of the Power Mate–H controller. The shell of
connector JD13 on the CRT/MDI unit side is connected to 0V of the
CRT/MDI unit. Connect the connector shells at both ends of the cable
to each other, using the free wires of cables J43 and J45. By means
of this arrangement, when the cable is connected to the Power
Mate–H controller, the shell of connector JD14 on the controller first
makes contact with the connector shell of the cable. Thus, the state
described above can be achieved.
3) When a CRT/MDI unit is connected after the Power Mate–H has been
turned on, maintenance operations such as memory all–clear cannot
be performed. (See 7.1.1 (d).) To perform maintenance operations,
turn the Power Mate–D off then on again, after connecting the
CRT/MDI.
133
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
7.1.9
CRT Terminating Unit 1) The CRT terminating unit (A02B–0124–D001) is designed to enable
adjustment of the waveform of a CRT link (RS485). The CRT/MDI
unit may operate normally without a CRT terminating unit, provided
the CRT link is short, or if the operating environment is free of noise.
For qualitative evaluation, however, always install a CRT terminating
unit prior to shipment. If the CRT terminating unit is not mounted,
the CRT screen may not be updated, and the keys may fail to operate.
2) A CRT link is terminated at both ends. Usually, a CRT terminating
unit is attached to the Power Mate–H installed at the far end. The
CRT/MDI unit has a built–in terminating resistor.
JD15
Terminating Terminating
resistor unit
CRT link
3) The CRT link includes the signals (RS485) for the simultaneous
block start function, and these signals are also terminated. When the
simultaneous block start function is not used, the signals need not be
terminated.
4) The CRT/MDI unit terminates the following signals with 200 ohms,
1/4 W:
! !
134
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
Resistor
Insulating heat–
shrinkable tube
7.1.10
Keyboard
135
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
7.2
SEPARATE TYPE
CRT/MDI INTERFACE
7.2.1 The Power Mate–H can be used in conjunction with a separate CRT unit
Outline and a separate MDI unit and a picuture display separate MDI unit.
Video cable
J53 Soft key
Power Mate cable
Separate MDI unit
JA1 CK2
J45
JD14 JD13 CPD2
JN1 CPD1
JD15 Terminating
unit FG
J47
J48
Power supply of
+24VDC10%
Mode selection switch 1.0A
1 Up to 16 Power Mates can be connected to one CRT and one MDI unit.
Connection is the same as for the CRT/MDI.
2 Connection of the terminating unit is the same as for the CRT/MDI.
3 The separate CRT unit is supplied with a soft key cable. Connect this
cable to the separate MDI unit. Keep in mind that the length of this
cable is 500 mm when positioning these units. See appendix A for the
connector position of the soft key cable in separate CRT unit.
4 The screen can be shared in the same way as for the CRT/MDI.
5 For details concerning cable J45 used to connect a Power Mate and the
separate MDI unit, see Subsection 7.1.3.
6 For details concerning cable J48 used to connect the power supply to
the separate MDI unit, see Subsection 7.1.7. Be sure to connect frame
ground.
7 For details concerning cable J47 used to connect the separate MDI unit
to the mode selection switch, see Subsection 7.1.6.
8 Video cable J53 and separate CRT power cable J56 are not supplied
with the unit.
9 Always connect the protective ground plates of the separate CRT unit
and separate MDI unit to ground.
10 To use a separate MDI unit and separate CRT unit, a CRT control
module must be installed in the Power Mate–H.
136
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
11 All interfaces not described here are the same as those of the CRT/MDI
unit.
WARNING
To have the separate CRT approved for the CE marking, it
is necessary to provide a shock hazard prevention cover
(A02B–0200–K820). Attaching the cover to the CRT is the
machine tool builder’s responsibility.
7.2.2
Video and Power
Separate MDI unit Separate CRT unit
Supply Interface
JA1 CN1
(PCR–EV20MDT) (MR–20RM)
Video cable
1 VDR 11 J53 1 VDR 14
8 0V
2 0V 12 VSYNC 2 HSYNC 15
9 0V
3 VDG 13 3 VSYNC 16
10 0V
4 0V 14 0V 4 VDG 17
11 0V
5 VDB 15 5 VDB 18
12 0V
6 0V 16 0V 6 19
13
7 17 FCI JAPAN 7 20
8 (DTC) 18 HSYNC SMS6PN–5
(housing)
9 19 (+24V) RC16M–SCT3
(contact)
10 (+24V) 20
( ): Unused signals
CPD2(AMP) Power cable
J56 1
1 +24V 2
CN2
2 0V 3 (SMS6RN–4)
JAPAN AMP 4 0V FCI JAPAN
3
1–178288–3
(housing) 5 +24V
1–175218–5
(contact) 6
Recommended cables
A66L–0001–0371 : 5–core coaxial cable
137
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
7.3
SEPARATE TYPE
PDP/MDI INTERFACE
7.3.1 The Power Mate–H is used in conjunction with a separate PDP unit, a
Outline separate MDI unit, and a picture display type separate MDI unit.
Video cable
J53 Soft key
Power Mate cable
Separate MDI unit
JA1 CK2
J45
JD14 JD13 CPD2
JN1 CPD1
JD15 Terminating
unit FG
J47
J48
Power supply of
+24VDC10%
Mode selection switch 2.2A
1 Up to 16 Power Mates can be connected to one PDP and one MDI unit.
Connection is the same as for the CRT/MDI.
2 Connection of the terminating unit is the same as for the CRT/MDI.
3 The separate PDP unit is supplied with a soft key cable. Connect this
cable to the separate MDI unit. Keep in mind that the length of this
cable is 450 mm when positioning these units. See appendix A for the
comector position of the soft key cable in separate CRT unit.
4 The screen can be shared in the same way as for the CRT/MDI.
5 For details concerning cable J45 used to connect a Power Mate and the
separate MDI unit, see Subsection 7.1.3.
6 For details concerning cable J48 used to connect the power supply to
the separate MDI unit, see Subsection 7.1.7. Be sure to connect frame
ground.
7 For details concerning cable J47 used to connect the separate MDI unit
to the mode selection switch, see Subsection 7.1.6.
8 Video cable J53 and separate CRT power cable J56 are not supplied
with the unit.
9 Always connect the protective ground plates of the separate CRT unit
and separate MDI unit to ground.
10 To use a separate MDI unit and separate PDP unit, a CRT control
module must be installed in the Power Mate–H.
11 All interfaces not described here are the same as those of the CRT/MDI
unit.
138
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
7.3.2
Video and Power
Supply Interface Separate MDI unit Separate PDP unit
JA1 CN1
(PCR–EV20MDT) (MR–20RM)
Video cable
1 VDR 11 J53 1 VDR 14
8 0V
2 0V 12 VSYNC 2 HSYNC 15
9 0V
3 VDG 13 3 VSYNC 16
10 0V 0V
4 0V 14 0V 4 VDG 17
11 0V 0V
5 VDB 15 5 VDB 18
12 0V
6 0V 16 0V 6 19
13
7 17 7 20
8 (DTC) 18 HSYNC
JAPAN AMP
9 19 1–178288–3
(housing)
10 20 1–175218–5
(contact)
( ): Unused signals Power cable
CPD2(AMP) J114 CN2
1 +24V
(BP2–VH)
1 +24V 2 0V JAPAN Crimp contact
2 0V JAPAN Crimp
3 contact
VHR–2V
(housing)
SVH–21T–1.1
(contact)
Recommended cables
A66L–0001–0371 : 5–core coaxial cable
139
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
7.3.3 Fine adjustment of the video signal is supported to enable its use with
Adjusting the Separate separate type PDP. This adjustment is necessary to compensate for errors
resulting from the combination of NC devices and cables.
Type PDP Adjustment of the video signal is necessary if you have replaced the
display unit, cable, or a hardware component of the display circuit in the
NC, either as part of regular field maintenance or to correct a failure.
Locations of switches
and jumper pins
SW2 SW1
Power
supply
Adjustment
D Eliminating flicker D Separate type PDP : Switch SW1
1 Change the jumper pin or switch setting such that flicker is eliminated.
2 If you find that flicker is eliminated by two or more different settings,
select the setting approximating to the midpoint of those settings.
Example : If flicker is eliminated by all of settings 2 to 6, select 4.
D Adjusting the horizontal D Separate type PDP : Switch SW2
position 1 The screen can be shifted horizontally in units of dots.
2 Adjust the horizontal position such that the entire screen is visible.
Only one setting can successfully realize this positioning.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to change any controls or settings other than
those described above.
NOTE
If two CNCs share one PDP by switching, the adjustment
described above must be made each time the CNC is
switched. So, it is not recommended that two CNCs share
one PDP.
140
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
7.4
SEPARATE TYPE
LCD/MDI INTERFACE
7.4.1 The Power Mate–H can also be used in combination with an LCD/MDI
Outline unit, separate LCD unit, separate MDI unit, or picture display separate
MDI unit.
Video cable
J136 Soft key
Power Mate cable
Separate MDI unit
JA1 CK2
J45
JD14 JD13 CPD2
JN1 CPD1
JD15 Terminating
unit FG
J138
J48
Power supply of
+24VDC10%
Mode selection switch 1.0A
141
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
10 The external dimensions of the LCD/MDI unit are the same as for the
CRT/MDI unit.
11 All interfaces not described here are the same as those of the CRT/MDI
unit.
NOTE
Even if only one Power Mate unit is connected, connection
must be made through the mode selection switch interface.
142
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
7.4.2
Video and Power
Supply Interface Separate MDI unit Separate LCD unit
(for Separate Type) JA1 JA1
(PCR–EV20MDT) (PCR–EV20MDT)
1 VDR 11 1 VDR 11
Video cable
2 0V 12 VSYNC J136 2 0V 12 VSYNC
3 VDG 13 3 VDG 13
4 0V 14 0V 4 0V 14 0V
5 VDB 15 5 VDB 15
6 0V 16 0V 6 0V 16 0V
7 17 7 17
8 (DTC) 18 HSYNC 8 18 HSYNC
9 19 (+24V) AMP JAPAN, LTD. 9 19
2–178288–3 (Housing)
10 (+24V) 20 2–175218–5 (Contact) 10 20
( ): Unused signals
CPD2(AMP) Power cable
J137 CP5
1 +24V 1 +24V
2 0V 2 0V
3 3
JAPAN AMP
1–178288–3 (housing)
1–175218–5 (contact)
Cable connector
for JA1
Cable connector for Connector
JA1 1 1 FI40B–20S
Connector VDR VDR (15–pin soldered
FI40B–20S 2 8 type)
(15–pin soldered 0V 0V Case FI–20–CV5
3 4
type) VDG Above parts made
Case FI–20–CV5
VDG
4 11 by Hirose Electric
Above parts made 0V 0V Co., Ltd.
by Hirose Electric 5 5
Co., Ltd. VDB VDB
6 12
0V 0V
18 2
HSYNC HSYNC
16 9
0V 0V
12 3
VSYNC VSYNC
14 10
0V 0V
shield
Recommended cables
A66L–0001–0371 : 5–core coaxial cable
NOTE
The video cable and power cable are delivered with the
LCD/MDI unit.
143
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
7.4.3 When a LCD/MDI or separate LCD unit is used, connection must be made
Device Selection through the device selection switch interface even if only one Power Mate
unit is connected.
Switch Interface
When using a separate LCD unit, connect JN1 (15) and JN1 (16).
Otherwise, the screen will shift up when displayed.
JN1
(PCR–EV20MDT)
Machine operator’s panel
1 *SEL0 11 *SEL4
2 0V 12 0V
J138
3 *SEL1 13 *SEL5 Device No. selection switch
4 0V 14 0V
5 *SEL2 15 *SEL6
6 0V 16 0V Short circuit
7 *SEL3 17 *SEL7
8 0V 18 0V
9 19
10 20
JN1
#0
1 #1
*SEL0 #2
3 #3
*SEL1 #4
5 #5
*SEL2 #6
7 #7
*SEL3 #8
11 #9
*SEL4 #10
13 #11
*SEL5 #12
15 #13
*SEL6 #14
17 #15
*SEL7 common
16
0V
2,4,6,8,12,14,16,18
0V
144
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG ten pairs)
Recommended connector
PCR–E20FS or PCR–E20FA
Housing PCR–V20LA
7.4.4 The LCD is provided with the following adjustment switch and
Adjusting the LCD potentiometers, the factory settings of which must not be changed.
(Adjustment is necessary only when the unit has been disassembled to
replace the adapter or LCD panel.)
VR1 : Flicker adjustment potentiometer
VRP1 : Contrast adjustment potentiometer
SW1 : Horizontal position adjustment switch
145
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
7.5
CONNECTION TO A
DETACHABLE
LCD/MDI UNIT
7.5.1 The Power Mate-H supports the use of a detachable LCD/MDI unit, which
consists of a 7.2" LCD/MDI unit housed in a portable dustproof case.
Outline
Detachable LCD/MDI unit
Cabinet
Power Mate
CRT/MDI
interface
Connection
panel
Connector
panel
146
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
7.5.2
Specifications Indicator 7.2” LCD, 40 characters by 16 lines
NOTE
This LCD/MDI unit does not support the picture display
function.
7.5.3
Detachable LCD/MDI 1) Inter–unit connection diagram
Unit Connected to One
Power Mate Unit
Cabinet
Connector 24 VDC
J132
panel power
supply
Detach- Connection
able LCD/ panel Power
MDI unit Mate
J127 J128 J126
CA50 JD14
(1) The total length of the cables (J127, J128, and J126) between the
detachable LCD/MDI unit and Power Mate must not exceed 50 m.
(2) Cables J127, J128, and J132 also serve as a 24 VDC power supply line
for the detachable LCD/MDI unit. The 24 VDC power is subject to
a voltage drop corresponding to the total resistance of the 24V line
and 0V line. Taking this voltage drop into consideration, determine
the cable length so that 24 VDC 10% is available at connector
CA50 of the detachable LCD/MDI unit.
(3) Attach a terminating unit (A02B–0124–D001) to connector JD15 of
the Power Mate.
(4) While the power is on, cables can be attached/detached to/from those
connectors on the connection panel that are shaded ( ) in the above
figure. For the other connectors (such as CA50 and JD14), cables can
neither be attached nor detached while the power is on.
147
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
Cabinet
Detachable
LCD/MDI unit
CA50 (01) RXD Connection Connector RXD JD14 (01) Power
panel Mate
CA50 (02) *RXD panel *RXD JD14 (02)
+24V (NOTE2)
CA50 (09, 10) +24V
+24V External power supply
CA50 (19, 20) 0V
0V 24 VDC
CA50 (05) FG
(Cabinet) Shield
CA50 (06) *SEL0
Device No. selec-
CA50 (07) *SEL1 tion switches on
CA50 (08) *SEL2 the machine oper-
ator’s panel
CA50 (14) *SEL3
CA50 (17) *SEL4
CA50 (18) *SEL7
NOTE
1 ATCH1 and ATCH2 can be used as DI signals for detecting whether a detachable LCD/MDI unit
is attached to the connection panel. ATCH1 and ATCH2, when unused, need not be
connected.
2 To attach or detach a detachable LCD/MDI unit while the Power Mate is turned on, 0V of the
Power Mate must be connected to 0V of the detachable LCD/MDI unit before any other line.
148
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
CA50
04 03 02 01 Connection
panel
J127
*TXD TXD *RXD RXD
10 09 08 07 06 05
Hirose Electric. Co., Ltd.
+24V +24V FG (1)Soldering type
HR22–12TPD–20S
16 15 14 13 12 11 (2)Crimp type
Housing
ATCH2 ATCH1 HR22–12TPD–20SC
Contact
20 19 18 17 HR22–SC–122
Manual crimping tool
0V 0V HR22–TA2428HC
16 #24AWG
(NOTE 1) ATCH2 ATCH2
19
0V 0V
20
0V 0V
05 Drain wire
FG FG
Shield
(NOTE 2)
Recommended cable
A66L–0001–0298: Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
(#24AWG pair x 2, #24AWG x 10, drain wire, external cable diameter: 8.5 mm)
NOTE
1 ATCH1, ATCH2
ATCH1 and ATCH2 can be used as DI signals for detecting whether a detachable LCD/MDI unit
is attached to the connection panel. ATCH1 and ATCH2, when unused, need not be
connected.
2 FG
Using a drain wire, connect CA50 (05) to the FG terminal of the connection panel.
Connect the FG terminal of the connection panel to the frame ground by using a twisted–pair
cable that is 100 to 300 mm long with a cross–sectional area of at least 2 mm2.
3 The external diameter of the cable used with connector CA50 is 8.5 mm. If the external
diameter of the cable is less than 8.5 mm, increase the diameter to 8.5 mm by using
heat–shrinkable tube or taping at the connector joint to ensure a dustproof connection.
149
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
JD14 (PCR–EV20MDT)
01 RXD 11 0V
02 *RXD 12 0V
J126
03 TXD 13
04 *TXD 14
HONDA TSUSHIN 05 15
KOGYO CO., LTD.
PCR–E20F 06 16
FANUC specifications 07 17
Soldering type (with
case) 08 18
A02B–0120–K301
09 19
Crimp type (with case)
A02B–0120–K302
10 20
Shield
Cable clamp
Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG 10 pairs): Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.,
Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
150
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
RXTP RXTP
Pair
*RXTP *RXTP
TXTP TXTP
Pair
*TXTP *TXTP
+24V +24V
+24V +24V
0V 0V
0V 0V
FG (NOTE 3)
Shield
Cable:
cable A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG 10 pairs): Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd., Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
cable Twisted–pair cable with cross–sectional area of at least 2 mm2 (FG)
NOTE
1 ATCH1 and ATCH2, when unused, need not be connected.
2 FG on the connection panel:
Connect the FG terminal on the connection panel to the frame ground. For this connection,
use a twisted–pair cable, 100 to 300 mm long, with a cross–sectional area of at least 2 mm2.
Use this FG terminal to connect the shield of cable J127 to ground.
3 FG on the connector panel:
On the connector panel, connect the shield of cable J128 to the frame ground. For this
connection, use a twisted–pair cable, 100 to 300 mm long and with a cross–sectional area of
at least 2 mm2.
151
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
Connector panel
0V 0V
152
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
7.5.4
When One Detachable
LCD/MDI Unit is Shared
by Multiple Power Mate
Units
7.5.4.1
When the 1) Inter–unit connection diagram
simultaneous block
start function is not
used
Cabinet
24VDC10% JD15
1.0A
J46
Power
Device No. selection Mate
switches #1
JD14
JD15
J46
(1) When using the CRT sharing function, mount the device No.
selection switches on the cabinet.
(2) The total length of the cables (J129, J130, J126, J46 x n) between the
detachable LCD/MDI unit and Power Mate units must not exceed 50
m.
(3) Cables J129, J130, and J132 also serve as a 24 VDC power supply line
for the detachable LCD/MDI unit. The 24 VDC power is subject to
a voltage drop corresponding to the total resistance of the 24V and 0V
lines. Taking this voltage drop into consideration, determine the
cable length so that 24 VDC 10% is available at connector CA50
of the detachable LCD/MDI unit.
(4) Attach a terminating unit (A02B–0124–D001) to connector JD15 of
the last Power Mate unit.
(5) The connections from Power Mate #0 to Power Mate #15 are the same
as those for the CRT/MDI unit.
(6) While the power is on, cables can be attached/detached to/from those
connectors on the connector panel that are shaded ( ) in the above
figure. For the other connectors (such as CA50 and JD14), cables can
neither be attached nor detached while the power is on.
153
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
Cabinet
Detachable LCD/MDI unit
CA50 (01) RXD Connection Connector RXD JD14 (01) Power
Mate
CA50 (02) *RXD panel panel JD14 (02)
*RXD
(NOTE 2)
+24V CA50 (09, 10) +24V
+24V External power supply
CA50 (19, 20) 0V
0V 24 VDC
CA50 (05) FG
(Cabinet) Shield
NOTE
1 ATCH1 and ATCH2 can be used as DI signals for detecting whether a detachable LCD/MDI unit
is attached to the connection panel. ATCH1 and ATCH2, when unused, need not be
connected.
2 To attach or detach a detachable LCD/MDI unit while the Power Mate is turned on, 0V of the
Power Mate must be connected to 0V of the detachable LCD/MDI unit before any other line.
CA50
Connection panel
04 03 02 01
10 09 08 07 06 05
Hirose Electric. Co., Ltd.
+24V +24V *SEL2 *SEL1 *SEL0 FG
(1)Soldering type
HR22–12TPD–20S
16 15 14 13 12 11
(2)Crimp type
Housing
ATCH2 ATCH1 *SEL3 HR22–12TPD–20SC
Contact
20 19 18 17 HR22–SC–122
Manual crimping tool
0V 0V *SEL7 *SEL4 HR22–TA2428HC
154
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
Detachable
LCD/MDI unit Connection panel
CA50
01
RXD RXD
02
*RXD *RXD
#24AWG pair
or
03 #28AWG pair
TXD TXD
04
*TXD *TXD
09
+24V +24V
10
+24V +24V
(NOTE 1) ATCH1 15
ATCH1
(NOTE 1) ATCH2 16
ATCH2
*SEL0 06
*SEL0
*SEL1 07
*SEL1 #24AWG
08 or
*SEL2 *SEL2 #28AWG
*SEL3 14
*SEL3
17
*SEL4 *SEL4
*SEL7 18
*SEL7
19
0V 0V
20
0V 0V
Drain
FG 05 wire FG
Shield (NOTE 3)
Recommended cables:
A66L–0001–0298: Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. (#24AWG pair x 2, #24AWG x 10, drain wire, external cable diameter: 8.5 mm), or
A66L–0001–0284#10P: Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd., Hitachi Cable, Ltd. (#28AWG pair, external cable diameter: 6.2 mm)
NOTE
1 ATCH1, ATCH2, *SELn
ATCH1 and ATCH2 can be used as DI signals for detecting whether a detachable LCD/MDI unit
is attached to the connection panel. ATCH1 and ATCH2, when unused, need not be
connected.
Connect only necessary signals out of *SEL0 to *SEL7 according to the number of devices.
The A66L–0001–0298 cable cannot be used if seven or more signals are being input from
ATCH1, ATCH2, and *SEL0 to *SEL7. In such a case, use cable A66L–0001–0284#10P.
2 The external diameter of the cable used with connector CA50 is 8.5 mm. If the external
diameter of the cable is less than 8.5 mm, increase the diameter to 8.5 mm by using
heat–shrinkable tube or taping at the connector joint to ensure a dustproof connection.
3 FG
Using a drain wire, connect CA50 (05) to the FG terminal of the connection panel.
Connect the FG terminal of the connector panel to the frame ground by using a twisted–pair
cable, 100 to 300 mm long and with a cross–sectional area of at least 2 mm2.
155
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
RXTP RXTP
Pair
*RXTP *RXTP
TXTP TXTP
*TXTP *TXTP
+24V 24V
+24V 24V
0V 0V
0V 0V
*SEL0
*SEL1
*SEL2
*SEL3
*SEL4
*SEL7
(NOTE 2)
FG
(NOTE 3)
Shield
(NOTE 4)
Cable:
cable A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG 10 pairs): Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd., Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
cable #28AWG6
cable Twisted–pair cable with a cross–sectional area of at least 2 mm2 (FG)
156
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
NOTE
1 ATCH1 and ATCH2, when unused, need not be connected.
2 FG on the connection panel
Connect the FG terminal on the connection panel to the
frame ground. For this connection, use a twisted–pair
cable, 100 to 300 mm long and with a cross–sectional area
of at least 2 mm2.
At this FG terminal, connect the shield of cable J129 to
ground.
3 FG on the connector panel
On the connector panel, connect the shield of cable J130 to
the frame ground. For this connection, use a twisted–pair
cable, 100 to 300 mm long and with a cross–sectional area
of at least 2 mm2.
4 Device No. selection switch connection
For details of device No. selection switch connection, see
Section 7.1.6.
157
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
7.5.4.2
When the 1) Inter–unit connection diagram
simultaneous block
start function is used
Cabinet
24VDC10% JD15
1.0A
J44
Power
Device No. selection Mate
switches #1
JD14
JD15
J44
(1) When using the CRT sharing function, mount the device No.
selection switches on the cabinet.
(2) The total length of the cables (J129, J130, J131, J44 x n) linking the
detachable LCD/MDI unit to the Power Mate units must not exceed
50 m.
(3) Cables J129, J130, and J132 also serve as a 24 VDC power supply line
for the detachable LCD/MDI unit. The 24 VDC power is subject to
a voltage drop corresponding to the total resistance of the 24V line
and 0V line. Taking this voltage drop into consideration, determine
the cable length so that 24 VDC 10% is available at connector
CA50 of the detachable LCD/MDI unit.
(4) Attach a terminating unit (A02B–0124–D001) to connector JD15 of
the last Power Mate unit.
(5) The connections from Power Mate #0 to any additional Power Mate
units are the same as those for the CRT/MDI unit.
(6) While the power is on, cables can be attached/detached to/from those
connectors on the connector panel that are shaded ( ) in the above
figure. For the other connectors (such as CA50 and JD14), cables can
neither be attached nor detached while the power is on.
158
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
Cabinet
Detachable LCD/MDI unit
Power Mate
CA50 (01) RXD Connection Connector panel RXD JD14 (01)
CA50 (02) *RXD panel *RXD JD14 (02)
TXD JD14 (03)
CA50 (03) TXD
*TXD JD14 (04)
CA50 (04) *TXD
0V JD14 (11, 12)
CA50 (15) ATCH1 (NOTE 1) to DI
ATCH
CA50 (16) ATCH2 ITPGA JD14 (05)
NOTE
1 ATCH1 and ATCH2 can be used as DI signals for detecting whether a detachable LCD/MDI unit
is attached to the connection panel. ATCH1 and ATCH2, when unused, need not be
connected.
2 To attach or detach a detachable LCD/MDI unit while the Power Mate is turned on, 0V of the
Power Mate must be connected to 0V of the detachable LCD/MDI unit before any other line.
159
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
01 RXD 11 0V
02 *RXD 12 0V
J131
03 TXD 13 SI1
04 *TXD 14 *SI1
160
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
JD14 Power Mate
01
RXD RXD
02
*RXD *RXD
03
TXD TXD
04
*TXD *TXD
05
ITPGA ITPGA
06
*ITPGA *ITPGA
07
ITPGB ITPGB
08
*ITPGB *ITPGB
09
SI0 SI0
20
*SI0 *SI0
13
SI1 SI1
14
*SI1 *SI1
15
SI2 SI2
16
*SI2 *SI2
17
SI3 SI3
18
*SI3 *SI3
11
0V 0V
12
0V 0V
Shield
Cable
clamp
Recommended cable
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG 10 pairs): Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd., Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
161
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
RXD RXD
*RXD *RXD
TXD TXD
0V ITPGB
R2
*ITPGB
SI1
R4
*SI1
SI2
R5
*SI2
SI3
R6
*SI3
0V
+24V
To external power
0V supply
R1 to R6 : 200W 1 / 4W
162
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
DPL/MDI unit Not compatible 2m Not allowed Provided with the unit (2 m).
Long–distance DPL/MDI unit Not compatible 40m Allowed To be prepared by the machine tool builder.
A cable (2 m/7 m/14 m) manufactured by FA-
NUC can be used for the DPL/MDI side cable.
Dustproof DPL/MDI unit Compatible 40m Allowed Only a cable (2 m/7 m/14 m) manufactured by
FANUC must be used for the DPL/MDI side
cable.
D15.M J6 D15.M
M4 CNPR
D15.M D15.F J6
M4 CNPR
J13 D15.M D15.M
Junction cable
163
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
Power DPL/MDI
Mate
M4, CNPR
panel
(01) 0V 0V (01)
(04) *ATCHPGM *ATCHPGM (04)
(09) *ATCHOPP *ATCHOPP (09)
(10) RXD TXD (12)
(11) *RXD *TXD (13)
(12) TXD RXD (10)
(13) *TXD *RXD (11)
(05) +5V +5V (05)
(07) 0V 0V (07)
(06) RTS CTS (15)
(14) *RTS *CTS (08)
(15) CTS RTS (06)
(08) *CTS *RTS (14)
Shell Shell
Shield
The following connectors are used on both the Power Mate and the
DPL/MDI.
D–SUB 15–pin male connector of the M3 screw–lock type ( 2)
Ordr the following drawing No. when purchasing the above FANUC
connector. Note that this connector cannot hold cables with a
diameter of 8 mm or more. Select proper wires for cabling.
Drawing No.: A02B–0118–K900
(17JE–23150–02 (D8B) of Daiichi Denshi Kogyo
Co., Ltd)
As shown in the figure above, pair off the following cables into
twisted pairs: RXD and *RXD, TXD and *TXD, RTS and *RTS, and
CTS and *CTS. If any of these cables are incorrectly paired,
problems caused by noise may result.
Determine the length of the cable by referring to (6) below.
164
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
Power Junction
Mate connector
M4
(01) 0V 0V (01)
(04) *ATCHPGM *ATCHPGM (04)
(09) *ATCHOPP *ATCHOPP (09)
(10) RXD RXD (10)
(11) *RXD *RXD (11)
(12) TXD TXD (12)
(13) *TXD *TXD (13)
(05) +5V +5V (05)
(07) 0V 0V (07)
(06) RTS RTS (06)
(14) *RTS *RTS (14)
(15) CTS CTS (15)
(08) *CTS *CTS (08)
Shell Shell
Shield
Male Female
Always connect the shell of each connector to 0V.
165
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
B"0.1 Panel
Nut
E or more 2–φ3.2"0.1 Connector
As shown in the figure above, pair off the following cables into
twisted pairs: RXD and *RXD, TXD and *TXD, RTS and *RTS, and
CTS and *CTS. If any of these cables are incorrectly paired,
problems caused by noise may result. Determine the length of the
cable by referring to (6) below.
(6) Selection of the cable
Select cables by applying the formula shown below so that the total
resistance of the wires for the power system (0 V and +5 V) is 3.9
ohms or less. Note, however, that a cable of 40 m or longer must not
be used even if it satisfies the formula.
ȏ R A t 3.9
1000
ȏ : Cable length [m]
R : Resistance of the wire for the power system [ohms/km]
A+ 1 ) 1
Number of wires for ) 5V Number of wires for 0V
Example:When two wires are used for each of 0 V and +5 V, and the
resistance of the wire is 233 ohms/km
A=1/2+1/2=1
233
ȏ 1000
1 t 3.9
166
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
7.7
I/O DEVICE
INTERFACE
Output
SD (Send data)
Input
RD (Receive data)
RS (Request to send) When CS is not used,
CS (Ready for sending) connect CS to RS.
FG (Frame ground)
167
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RD 104 Input Receive data OFF
(The ISO code for 0 is sent)
NOTE
The signal is turned on and off as follows:
–3V or lower +3V or higher
Function OFF ON
Signal Condition Marking Spacing
168
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8
(b) Codes
The following codes are used:
i) EIA code + control codes DC1 to DC4
ii) ISO code + control codes DC1 to DC4
An I/O device must be able to identify the following control
codes output from the NC system:
Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DC1 Start tape reader Ę ° Ę
DC2 Specify tape punch Ę ° Ę
DC3 Stop tape reader Ę Ę ° Ę Ę
DC4 Release tape punch Ę ° Ę
NOTE
The control codes above are commonly used regardless of
whether the EIA code or ISO code is used.
With this interface, control codes DC1 to DC4 are used. Note the
following:
(a) The NC machine can control an I/O device by sending DC1
to DC4.
(b) An I/O device can perform the operations below if it is not
ready to receive data from the NC machine.
(i) The I/O device can temporarily stop data transmission
from the NC machine by using the CS signal on the NC.
The CS signal, when turned off and sent to the NC
machine, causes the NC machine to stop data
transmission after sending a maximum of two
charactersincluding characters currently being
transmitted. When the CS signal is turned on again, data
transmission resumes.
(ii) When control code DC3 is sent to the NC machine, the
NC machine stops data transmission after sending 10 or
less characters. Then, when control code DC1 is sent to
the NC machine, the NC machine resumes data
transmission. When an I/O device containing an
ISO/EIA converter is used, the device needs to satisfy the
specifications of Table 7.7.1 (a).
169
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
Table 7.7.1
ISO code EIA code
Meaning
Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
0 f f ° 0 f ° Numeral 0
1 f f f ° f 1 ° f Numeral 1
2 f f f ° f 2 ° f Numeral 2
3 f f ° f f 3 f ° f f Numeral 3
4 f f f ° f 4 ° f Numeral 4
5 f f ° f f 5 f ° f f Numeral 5
6 f f ° f f 6 f ° f f Numeral 6
7 f f f ° f f f 7 ° f f f Numeral 7
8 f f f f ° 8 f ° Numeral 8
9 f f f ° f 9 f f ° f Numeral 9
A f ° f a f f ° f Address A
B f ° f b f f ° f Address B
C f f ° f f c f f f ° f f Address C
D f ° f d f f ° f Address D
E f f ° f f e f f f ° f f Address E
F f f ° f f f f f f ° f f Address F
G f ° f f f g f f ° f f f Address G
H f f ° h f f f ° Address H
I f f f ° f i f f f f ° f Address I
J f f f ° f j f f ° f f Address J
K f f ° f f k f f ° f Address K
L f f f ° f l f ° f f Address L
M f f ° f f m f f ° f Address M
N f f ° f f n f ° f f Address N
O f f f ° f f f o f ° f f Not used at significant information section
in ISO code.
Assumed as program No. in EIA code.
P f f ° p f f ° f f f Address P
Q f f f ° f q f f f ° Address Q
R f f f ° f r f f ° f Address R
S f f ° f f s f f ° f Address S
T f f f ° f t f ° f f Address T
U f f ° f f u f f ° f Address U
V f f ° f f v f ° f f Address V
W f f f ° f f f w f ° f f Address W
X f f f f ° x f f ° f f f Address X
Y f f f ° f y f f f ° Address Y
Z f f f ° f z f f ° f Address Z
DEL f f f f f ° f f f Del f f f f ° f f f Delete (cancel an error punch).
Not punched. Can not be used in signifi-
NUL ° Blank °
cant section in EIA code.
BS f f ° BS f f ° f Back space
HT f ° f Tab f f f ° f f Tabulator
LF or NL f ° f CR or EOB f ° End of block
CR f f ° f f Carriage return
SP f f ° SP f ° Space
% f f ° f f ER f ° f f Absolute rewind stop
( f f ° ( 2–4–5 ) f f ° f Control out (a comment is started)
) f f f f ( 2–4–7 ) f f f Control in (the end of a comment)
+ f f ° f f + f f f ° Positive sign
– f f ° f f – f ° Negative sign
: f f f ° f Colon
/ f f f ° f f f / f f ° f Optional block skip
. f f ° f f . f f f ° f f Period (A decimal point)
# f f ° f f Sharp
$ f ° f Dollar sign
& f f ° f f & f ° f f Ampersand
’ f ° f f f Apostrophe
* f f f ° f Asterisk
, f f f ° f , f f f f f Comma
; f f f f ° f f Semicolon
< f f f ° f Left angle bracket
= f f f f ° f f Equal
> f f f f ° f f Right angle bracket
? f f f ° f f f Question mark
@ f f ° Commercial at mark
” f f Quotation
170
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
NOTE
When an I/O device containing an ISO/EIA converter is
used, pay special attention to the following in Table 7.7.1(a).
NOTE
Control codes DC1 to DC4 are transmission codes output
from the NC machine, and need not be fed as paper tape
information.
171
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
ER (output)
RS (output)
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅ ÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅ ÅÅ
DC1 DC3 DC1 DC3
ÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅÅÅ
SD (output)
ER code
RD (input)
DR (input)
ÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅÅÅ
CS (input)
Fig.7.7.1(b)
172
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
When the NC sends data (1) The NC machine sends a DC2 code.
(punch–out) (2) The NC machine sends punch–out information.
(3) While the I/O device is processing data:
(a) The CS signal on the NC can be turned off to cause the NC
machine to stop data transmission after sending a maximum of
two characters including characters currently being transmitted.
When the CS signal is turned on again, data transmission
resumes. (See Fig. 7.7.1 (c).)
(b) When a DC3 control code is sent to the NC machine, the NC
machine stops data transmission after sending 10 or less
characters, which are counted starting at the time of DC3 code
transmission. Then, when a DC1 control code is sent to the NC,
the NC machine resumes data transmission. (See Fig. 7.7.1 (d).)
(4) Upon completion of data transmission, the NC machine sends a DC4
code.
ER (output)
RS (output)
ÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅÅ
DC2 DC4
SD (output)
DR (input)
CS (input)
Fig.7.7.1(c)
ER (output)
ÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅÅ
RS (output)
DC2 DC4
SD (output)
ÅÅ ÅÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅ Å
DC3 DC1
RD (input)
10 or less characters
DR (input)
CS (input)
1ms or more
Fig.7.7.1(d)
173
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
NC I/O device
SD SD
RD RD
RS RS
CS CS
ER ER
DR DR
CD CD
SG SG
FG FG
174
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
7.7.2
RS–232–C Serial Port
Power Mate Relay connector
(DBM–25S)
1 FG
(PCR-EV20MDT) 14
2 SD
1 RD 11 SD 15
3 RD
2 0V 12 0V 16
J42 4 RS
3 DR 13 ER 17
5 CS
4 0V 14 0V 18
6 DR
5 CS 15 RS 19
Connector 7 SG
6 0V 16 0V PCR–E20FA 20 ER
8 CD
7 CD 17 or 21
9
8 0V 18 PCR–E20FS 22
Case: PCR– 10
9 19 +24V 23
V20CA 11
10 +24V 20 24
12
25 +24V
13
175
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
7.7.3
FANUC FLOPPY
Relaying connector signal layout
CASSETTE and Handy
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
File Connection
FG SD RD RS CS DR SG CD
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
ER +24
Relaying connector
Connector : DBM-25S
(JAPAN AVIATION
ELECTRONIC
INDUSTRY., LTD.)
Power Mate Lock metal : D20418-J2
(JAPAN AVIATION
JD5 ELECTRONIC
Relaying
(PCR-EV20MDT) INDUSTRY., LTD.)
cable
1 RD 11 SD
2 0V 12 0V FANUC
FLOPPY
3 DR 13 ER
CASSETTE/
4 0V 14 0V FG HANDY
5 CS 15 RS FILE
6 0V 16 0V +24V10%
Connector Appendant 1.0A
7 CD 17 PCR-E20FA
8 0V 18 or
9 19 +24V PCR-E20FS
10 +24V 20
Case: PCR-
V20CA
NOTE
1 Machine tool builder shall furnish relay connector and relay
cable.
2 Use a totally shielded cable for the signal cable.
Recommended cable specification : A66L-0001-0284#10P
(Line length : 15m or less)
3 Open all terminals other than illustrated.
4 Set a parameter to be able to use reader puncher interface
when connecting FANUC cassette/Handy file.
The baud rate is 4800 baud.
5 The Power Mate can be used to route 24 VDC power to the
FANUC Floppy Cassette/Handy File. In this case,
additional 24 VDC (1.0 A) power needs to be fed to the
Power Mate.
176
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
7.7.4
When External Power
Relaying connector signal layout
Supply Is Used
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
FG SD RD RS CS DR SG CD
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
ER +24
Relaying connector
Connector : DBM-25S
(JAPAN AVIATION
ELECTRONIC
INDUSTRY., LTD.)
Power Mate Lock metal : D20418-J2
(JAPAN AVIATION
JD5 ELECTRONIC
Relaying
(PCR-EV20MDT) INDUSTRY., LTD.)
cable
1 RD 11 SD
2 0V 12 0V FANUC
FLOPPY
3 DR 13 ER
CASSETTE/
4 0V 14 0V FG HANDY
5 CS 15 RS FILE
6 0V 16 0V +24VDC
24 VDC Appendant 10%
7 CD 17
10A 1.0A
8 0V 18
9 19 (+24V) 0V is conĆ
10 (+24V) 20
nected to
SG.
NOTE
1 Machine tool builder shall furnish relay connector, relay
cable and 24VDC.
2 Use a totally shielded cable for the signal cable.
Recommended cable specification : A66L-0001-0284#10P
(Line length : 15m or less)
3 Open all terminals other than illustrated.
4 Set a parameter to be able to use reader puncher interface
when connecting FANUC cassette/Handy file.
The baud rate is 4800 baud.
5 If 24 VDC power is supplied to the FANUC Floppy
Cassette/Handy File from another power supply, 24 VDC
(1.0 A) power for FANUC I/O devices need not be fed to the
Power Mate.
177
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
7.8
EXTERNAL PULSE
INPUT INTERFACE
7.8.1
Diferential Input Type
(Position Coder Type) Power Mate
Cable wiring
External pulse
Power Mate generator
5
PA PA
6 #24AWG
*PA *PA
7 pair
PB PB
8
*PB *PB
12,14,16
0V 0V #20AWG
SHIELD
NOTE
1 This interface cannot be used together with an external
pulse input interface of single–phase input type.
2 The Power Mate can supply power to a unit requiring not
more than 0.35 A at 5 V. In this case, pay careful attention
to the voltage drop caused by the cable resistance. Assume
4.95 V for the 5 V power of the Power Mate.
3 Line length is 5m or less.
178
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
PA
*PA
PB
*PB
TP TP TP TP
TCYC
PA
*PA
PB
*PB
TP TP TP TP
PA
PB
Positive–
Output from direction
the discriminator pulses
for the CNC
Negative–
direction
pulses
Fig.7.8.1(b) Sequence
179
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
4,3
5 5 PA
PA
6
6 *PA
7 1,2
9
10 12,13
7 PB
11
PB
8 *PB
14,15
180
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
7.8.2
Single–phase Input
Type (Using a Manual Power Mate External pulse generator
Pulse Generator) JA12
(PCR–EV20MDT)
1 11
2 12 0V
0V HA HB
3 HA 13
4 HB 14 0V
5 (PA) 15
6 (*PA) 16 0V
7 (PB) 17
8 (*PB) 18 (+5V)
9 (+5V) 19
10 20 (+5V)
Cable connection
3
HA1 HA #24AWG
4 pair
HB1 HB
12,14,16
0V 0V #20AWG
Shield
Recommended wire
A66L–0001–0286 (#20AWG x 6 + #24AWG x 3 pairs)
#20AWG=0.0394W/m
NOTE
1 This interface cannot be used simultaneously with the an
external pulse input interface of differential input type.
2 The Power Mate can supply power to devices requiring
5 V, 0.35 A or less. In this case, pay careful attention to the
voltage drop caused by the cable resistance. Assume 4.95
V for the 5 V power of the Power Mate.
3 Line length is 50m or less.
181
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
Command pulses The following figure shows the relationship between the command pulses
and electrical specifications of the HA and HB signals.
HA
T
T14
HB
1 1
T4 T4
Positive–
direction
pulses
Negative–
direction
pulses
Tu330µsec
Direction reversed
Threshold voltages of The threshold voltages of the Power Mate receiver are:
the Power Mate receiver Vth(°) = 3.3 V
Vth(±) = 2.1 V
Recommended circuit
VCC
300 W
to CNC OUTPUT
0V
182
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
JSn JSnB
(PCR–EV20MDT) (PCR–EV20MDT)
1 IRn 11 ISn 1 IRn 11 ISn
2 GDRn 12 GDSn 2 GDRn 12 GDSn
3 *PWMAn 13 *ENBLn 3 *PWMAn 13 *ENBLn
4 0V 14 0V 4 0V 14 0V
5 *PWMCn 15 PDN 5 *PWMCn 15 PDN
6 0V 16 *PDn 6 0V 16 *PDn
7 *PWMEn 17 PREQn 7 *PWMEn 17 PREQn
8 0V 18 *PREQn 8 0V 18 *PREQn
Cable connection
1 1
IRn IRn
2 2
GDRn GDRn
3 3
*PWMAn *PWMAn
4 4
0V 0V
5 5
*PWMCn *PWMCn
6 6
0V 0V
7 7
*PWMEn *PWMEn
8 8
0V 0V
9 9
*DRDYn *DRDYn
10 10
*MCONn *MCONn
11 11
ISn ISn
12 12
GDSn GDSn
13 13
*ENBLn *ENBLn
14 14
0V 0V
15 15
PDn PDn
16 16
*PDn *PDn
17 17
PREQn PREQn
18 18
*PREQn *PREQn
19 19
0V 0V
20 20
0V 0V
Shield
Recommended wire
A66L–0001–0284#10P(#28AWG 10 pairs)
Recommended cable specification
A02B–0120–K800(5m)
183
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
184
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
7.10
CONNECTION TO
THE HANDY
OPERATOR’S PANEL
7.10.1 The handy operator’s panel has machine operator’s panel functions for
Outline teaching operations, as well as DPL/MDI functions for displaying and
setting the Power Mate parameters and programs.
Emer-
gency
stop
contact
CRT/MDI
interface
Connection
panel
Connector
Safety relay
panel
Handy operator’s
panel enable
switch
Servo External pow-
amplifier er supply
24 VDC
185
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
7.10.2 The handy operator’s panel has an emergency stop button and deadman’s
Emergency Stop switches (right side and left side). In any of the following cases, the
emergency stop state is assumed, and the Power Mate and servo amplifier
are so notified:
1) When the emergency stop button is pressed
2) When the deadman’s switch enable switch is on, and both of the
deadman’s switches are released
3) When a handy operator’s panel error occurs, disabling normal
communications, while the handy operator’s panel is being used
Notifying the Power Mate The Power Mate is notified of an emergency stop by means of
of an emergency stop communication from the handy operator’s panel when the emergency
stop state is set with the handy operator’s panel.
When the handy operator’s panel is connected as shown in the figure
below, pressing the DOOR OPEN LIMIT switch or the emergency stop
switch on the machine operator’s panel also places the handy operator’s
panel in the emergency stop state.
Notifying the servo To notify the servo amplifier of an emergency stop, the emergency stop
amplifier of an contact of the handy operator’s panel is connected in series with a separate
emergency stop emergency stop contact such as that of the machine operator’s panel or the
door open limit switch. If any of these contacts is closed, the relay for
emergency stop input to the servo amplifier is activated.
24V
Servo amplifier
Safety Emergency
relay stop input
186
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
7.10.3 The CE standard does not allow the handy operator’s panel to be made
Connection Allowing detachable by installing a connection panel in the cabinet. This is because
the CE standard does not allow emergency stop operation to be bypassed.
the Handy Operator’s In this case, keep the handy operator’s panel connected at all times.
Panel to be Detached
1) Inter–unit connection
Cabinet
Connection
panel
Connector Power
Handy panel Mate
operator’s J118
panel J122 J120
JD14
CRS10
Terminating
24VDC10% Handy operator’s JD15
unit
0.2A panel enable
switch
J135 24 VDC
power
supply
Emergency
J121 J119
stop on ma-
chine opera-
tor’s panel,
etc.
Safety (NOTE 1)
relay
NOTE
1 Safety relay:
This safety relay acts as a contact for emergency stop input to the servo amplifier, and a contact
for the MCC contactor. For details, refer to the ”FANUC Control Motor Amplifier Series Safe
Circuit Conditions and Sample Configurations (A–71429–S13J).”
2 The total length of the cables (J118, J122, and J120) between the handy operator’s panel and
the Power Mate must not exceed 50 m.
3 Cables J118, J122, and J135 also serve as a 24 VDC power supply line for the handy operator’s
panel. The 24 VDC power is subject to a voltage drop corresponding to the total resistance of
the 0V and 24V lines. Taking this voltage drop into consideration, determine the cable length
so that 24 VDC +10% is available at connector CRS10 of the handy operator’s panel.
4 Attach a terminating unit (A02B–0166–D003) to connector JD15 of the Power Mate. The CRT
terminating unit (A02B–0124–D001) cannot be used.
187
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
NOTE
1 While the switch is off, the handy operator’s panel emergency stop operation is bypassed.
While the switch is on, power is fed to the handy operator’s panel, such that emergency stop
operation is enabled.
2 When the deadman’s switch enable switch is not being used, never make this connection.
Thus, the deadman’s switches are enabled at all times.
3 A separate safety relay is required to act as a contact for emergency stop input to the servo
amplifier, and also as a contact for the MCC contactor. For details, refer to the ”FANUC Control
Motor Amplifier α Series Safe Circuit Conditions and Sample Configurations
(A–71429–S13J).”
4 To attach or detach a handy operator’s panel while the Power Mate is turned on, 0V of the Power
Mate must be connected to 0V of the handy operator’s panel before any other line.
5 Unless +24 V is supplied to EMGTP (CRS10–11), the handy operator’s panel is placed in the
emergency stop state.
188
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
2) Connection panel
The connection panel can be used to make the handy operator’s panel
detachable from the cabinet.
On the connection panel, install a connector to which the handy
operator’s panel cable can be attached, and also install a switch to
enable/disable the handy operator’s panel.
A switch with contact A and contact B is required. contact A is used Example of switch
to feed 24 VDC to the handy operator’s panel, while contact B is CONNECT
used for bypassing handy operator’s panel emergency stop while the
switch is set to DISCONNECT.
DIS–
CONNECT
The CE standard does not allow emergency stop opera-
tion to be bypassed.
Emergency stop
To connector
Connection panel panel relay
(1) While the enable switch is set to DISCONNECT (while the switch is
off)
D The handy operator’s panel does not receive 24 VDC, hence cannot
be used.
D Emergency stop cannot be performed from the handy operator’s
panel.
(2) While the enable switch is set to CONNECT (while the switch is on)
D The handy operator’s panel receives 24 VDC, hence can be used.
D Emergency stop can be performed from the handy operator’s panel.
The emergency stop described above occurs when the emergency stop
button on the handy operator’s panel is pressed, or when the deadman’s
switch enable switch is on and both of the deadman’s switches are
released.
189
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
Handy operator’s
panel
CRS10
04 03 02 01 Connection panel
(connector panel)
*TXD TXD *RXD RXD J118
10 09 08 07 06 05
Hirose Electric. Co., Ltd.
+24V +24V FG
(1)Soldering type
16 15 14 13 12 11 HR22–12TPD–20S
(housing and
ATCH2 ATCH1 EMGEN EMGDM EMGTP
contact)
20 19 18 17 (2)Crimp type
S Housing
0V 0V HR22–12TPD–20SC
S Contact
HR22–SC–122
S Manual crimping tool
HR22–TA2428HC
FANUC specification
A02B–0211–K381
190
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
01
RXD RXD
02
*RXD *RXD
Shielded
#24AWG pair
03
TXD TXD
04
*TXD *TXD
09
+24V +24V
10
+24V +24V
11
EMGTP EMGTP
12
EMGDM EMGDM
13 #24AWG
EMGEN EMGEN
15
ATCH1 ATCH1
16
ATCH2 ATCH2
19
0V 0V
20
0V 0V
05 Drain
FG wire FG
Shield (NOTE 1)
Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0298: Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
(Shielded #24AWG pair x 2, #24AWG x 10, drain wire, external cable diameter: 8.5 mm)
NOTE
1 FG
S Using a drain wire, connect CRS10(05) to the FG terminal of the connector panel.
S Connect the FG terminal on the connector panel to the frame ground. For this connection,
use a twisted–pair cable, 100 to 300 mm long and a cross–sectional area of at least 2 mm2.
2 The external diameter of the cable used with connector CRS10 is 8.5 mm. If the external
diameter of the cable is less than 8.5 mm, increase the diameter to 8.5 mm by using
heat–shrinkable tube or taping at the connector joint to ensure a dustproof connection.
191
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
JD14 (PCR–EV20MDT)
01 RXD 11 0V
02 *RXD 12 0V
J120
03 TXD 13
04 *TXD 14
HONDA TSUSHIN 05 15
KOGYO CO., LTD.
PCR–E20F 06 16
FANUC specifications 07 17
SSoldering type (with
case) 08 18
A02B–0120–K301
SCrimp type (with case)
09 ATCH1 19
A02B–0120–K302
10 20 ATCH2
Shield
Cable clamp
Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG 10 pairs):
Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
192
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
Emergency stop on
the machine opera-
tor’s panel To Power Mate *ESP input
24V
Connector
J121 panel
(Separate emergen-
cy stop contact such
as the door open
limit switch)
Deadman’s
switch (left) CRS10 (12) EMGDM J119
Safety
relay
(NOTE)
NOTE
Safety relay:
This safety relay acts both as a contact for emergency stop input to the servo amplifier, and as
a contact for the MCC contactor. For details, refer to the ”FANUC Control Motor Amplifier α
Series Safe Circuit Conditions and Sample Configurations (A–71429–S13J).”
Enable the safety relay on the handy operator’s panel by connecting the emergency stop
contact of the handy operator’s panel in series with a separate emergency stop contact such
as the emergency stop contact of the machine operator’s panel or the door open limit switch.
With the connection shown above, the safety relay is switched off when:
1) The emergency stop button is pressed, or
2) The deadman’s switch enable switch is on (with the contact open), and both of the
deadman’s switches are released.
So, the contact for emergency stop input to the servo amplifier and the MCC contact are opened
to turn off the power.
193
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
Connection Connector
panel panel
EMGEN EMGEN
EMGDM EMGDM
#24AWG
ATCH1 ATCH1
ATCH2 ATCH2
0V 0V
0V 0V
(NOTE 1) Drain
FG wire (NOTE 2)
EMGTP
EMGDM
+24V
+24V
Recommended cables:
cable A66L–0001–0298 (#24AWG pair x 2, #24AWG x 10), Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
cable #24AWG 5
cable Twisted–pair cable with a cross–sectional area of at least 2 mm2 (FG)
NOTE
1 FG on the connection panel:
Connect the FG terminal on the connection panel to the frame ground. For this connection,
use a twisted–pair cable, 100 to 300 mm long and with a cross–sectional area of at least 2 mm2.
At this FG terminal, connect the shield of cable J118 to ground.
2 FG on the connector panel:
On the connector panel, connect this FG terminal to the frame ground. For this connection, use
twisted–pair cable, 100 to 300 mm long and with a cross–sectional area of at least 2 mm2.
At this FG terminal, connect the shield of cable J122 to ground.
194
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
Connector panel
External power
supply J135
24VDC
0V 0V
Power Mate
Terminating unit JD15
01
RD B
R 02 Direct resistor connection
RD A
195
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
7.10.4
Keeping the Handy 1) Inter–unit connection diagram
Operator’s Panel
Connected at All Times
Cabinet
Connector Power
Handy panel
operator’s Mate
panel J118 J120
JD14
CRS10
J135 24 VDC
power
supply
Emergency stop
on machine op- J121 J119
erator’s panel,
etc.
Safety
relay (NOTE 1)
NOTE
1 The safety relay acts both as a contact for emergency stop input to the servo amplifier, and as
a contact for the MCC contactor. For details, refer to ”FANUC Control Motor Amplifier α Series
Safe Circuit Conditions and Sample Configurations (A–71429–S13J).”
2 The total length of the cables (J118 and J120) between the handy operator’s panel and the
Power Mate must not exceed 50 m.
3 Cables J118 and J135 also serve as a 24 VDC power supply line to the handy operator’s panel.
The 24 VDC power is subject to a voltage drop corresponding to the total resistance of the 0V
and 24V lines. Taking this voltage drop into consideration, determine the cable length so that
24 VDC 10% is available at connector CRS10 of the handy operator’s panel.
4 Attach a terminating unit (A02B–0166–D003) to connector JD15 of the Power Mate. The CRT
terminating unit (A02B–0124–D001) cannot be used.
5 For details of connecting cables J118 to J121 and J135, see Section 7.10.3.
196
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
Handy operator’s panel
CRS10 (01) RXD Connector panel RXD JD14 (01) Power
Mate
CRS10 (02) *RXD *RXD JD14 (02)
NOTE
1 When the deadman’s switch enable switch is not used, do not make this connection. Thus, the
deadman’s switches are enabled at all times.
2 A separate safety relay is required to act as a contact for emergency stop input to the servo
amplifier, and as a contact for the MCC contactor. For details, refer to ”FANUC Control Motor
Amplifier α Series Safe Circuit Conditions and Sample Configurations (A–71429–S13J).”
3 Unless +24 V is supplied to EMGTP (CRS10–11), the handy operator’s panel is placed in the
emergency stop state.
7.10.5 When using the handy operator’s panel, set the Power Mate rotary
Power Mate Setting switches as follows:
1) Set RSW to 0.
2) Set MTSW to 3.
197
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
7.11 The connection unit is used to connect the master units of different
FANUC I/O Link systems, such as the CNC and F–D Mate, with the I/O
FANUC I/O LINK Link and transfer the DI/DO signals between the master units.
CONNECT UNIT
System A System B
FANUC I/O Link
connection unit
DI DO
DO DI
The I/O data can be sent between the master units of two independent
FANUC I/O Link systems. While a FANUC I/O Link system is turned
off, or stopped for adjustment or maintenance, another FANUC I/O Link
system on the same line can be operated. All the DI data sent from the
stopped system is automatically processed as 0. If normal
communication between two systems is interrupted by a sudden stop of
one system, it takes from several tens to several hundreds of milliseconds
to start that function. During this period, the most recent data before the
system stop is transferred. Take this into account when designing the
systems.
198
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
(1) Specifications
Item Description
Function of the I/O Link The I/O Link has two I/O Link interfaces in the slave
mode and transfers the DI/DO data between the in-
terfaces.
[Interfaces]
Electric/optical
Electric/electric Select a desired interface.
Optical/optical
Ordering code
Interface Code
199
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
(2) Connection
(a) Example of a connection diagram
Optical I/O
JD1A1 for Link adapter
CP* CP*
Power Mate
Electric Optical
interface interface (2)
JD1B* COPB*
JD1A* COPA*
(2)
(1)
FANUC I/O Link * : 1 or 2 (channel number)
connection unit
(electric/optical interface)
: Signal cable (electric)
The frame of the FANUC I/O Link connection
(2) : Signal cable (optical)
unit must be connected to a proper ground.
(3) : Power cable
200
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
JD1A1/JD1A2 JD1B1/JD1B2
11 0V 1 RXB 11 0V 1 RXA
12 0V 2 RXB 12 0V 2 RXA
13 0V 3 TXB 13 0V 3 TXA
14 0V 4 TXB 14 0V 4 TXA
15 0V 5 15 0V 5
16 0V 6 16 0V 6
17 7 17 7
18 8 18 8
19 9 19 9
20 10 20 10
CP1/CP2 connector
1 2 3 Connector for Y
Y + 24V 0V (Input)
X + 24V 0V (Output)
201
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
202
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
7.12
CONNECTING A
TOUCH PANEL
7.12.3
Connection
DPL/MDI
JD15
Terminating unit M4
203
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
7.12.4
Power–on Sequence
Power Mate power–on
Set (t+1) in the touch panel system setting item ”start time.”
No problem arises if the Power Mate is turned on earlier than the touch
panel.
7.12.5 The following Power Mate address data can be read from the touch panel:
Power Mate Data that D Input address: X0000 to X0127
X1000 to X1063
can be Read from the
D Output address: Y0000 to Y0127
Touch Panel Y1000 to Y1063
D Internal relay: R0000 to R0999
D Keep relay: K0000 to K0019
D Data table: D0000 to D1859
D Timer: T0000 to T0079
D Counter: C0000 to C0079
7.12.6
Power Mate Data That D Internal relay R000 to R0999
Can Be Set Through
the Touch Panel D Counter C0000 to C0079
204
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
7.12.7
Details of Cable J123
and the Terminating
Unit
04 14
Terminating 05 15
unit
06 16
07 17
08 18
09 19
10 20
205
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
Power Mate
Terminating unit JD15
01
RD B
R 02 Direct resistor connection
RD A
1) Recommended cable:
KA66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG x 10 pairs, shielded): Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
#28AWG
2) Terminating resistor (Power Mate side) R
For R in the terminating unit, use a 100–ohm 1/2W resistor.
206
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
7.13
HIGH–SPEED SERIAL
BUS INTERFACE
7.13.1 The Power Mate can be connected, via the FANUC high–speed serial bus
Outline (referred to as the HSSB), to a FANUC intelligent terminal or
commercially available personal computer.
Commercially available
personal computer
Power Mate
HSSB interface
board
207
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
7.13.2
Connection
Power Mate
DPL/MDI
7.13.3
Supplement (1) An HSSB connection module must be installed in the Power Mate.
(2) An HSSB adaptor must be attached to the Power Mate. After
connecting an HSSB adaptor, tighten the screw locks. Sufficient
space for installing the HSSB adaptor, as well as for maintenance,
must be provided.
(3) When an HSSB connection module is used, the CRT control module
and touch panel connection module cannot be used. This means that
the CRT, PDP, and LCD units, detachable LCD unit, touch panel
(manufactured by Digital Corporation), and handy operator’s panel
cannot be used.
(4) The version of the base printed circuit board of the Power Mate–H
must be 06F or later.
(5) For details of the version of the basic functions of the Power Mate–H
that are compatible with the HSSB, contact FANUC.
208
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
7.14
ANALOG SERVO
INTERFACE
7.14.1 The Power Mate–H supports analog servo control based on the speed
Outline command signal (VCMD). The pulse coder interface of the Power
Mate–H is a serial pulse coder interface, so that a parallel/serial interface
conversion unit (for each axis) is also required.
7.14.2
System Configuration
Power Mate–H
K1 VCMD
Connector Analog servo
JSn amplifier
panel
K5
Parallel feedback
Serial feedback K4
K2 Parallel/serial
interface con- (TG)
n = 3 to 6 K3 version unit
External 5 V (Pulse
power sup- encoder) Analog motor
ply
FANUC can supply only the Power Mate–H and parallel/serial interface
conversion unit. The customer is responsible for preparing the connector
panel, analog servo amplifier, analog motor, external 5 V power supply,
and inter–unit cables.
The external 5 V power supply is used for the parallel/serial interface
conversion unit and pulse encoder (when operating on 5 V).
7.14.3 The Power Mate–H has a 1st/2nd axis digital servo module in the basic
Axis Configuration unit. For the 3rd/4th and 5th/6th modules, the user can select a digital
servo module or analog servo module in 2–axis steps.
1st/2nd Digital servo axis only
209
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
7.14.4
Details of Connection 1) Connector panel
The servo interface of the Power Mate–H is provided with connectors
for both analog servo interface signals and serial pulse coder interface
signals. So, a connector panel is required to connect the Power
Mate–H to each unit.
From the connector panel, power is fed to the parallel/serial interface
conversion unit. Power to the pulse encoder is then provided from the
parallel/serial interface conversion unit.
2) Overall connection diagram
210
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
3) Details of signals
1. VCMD, EC (output)
VCMD and EC are the speed command signals for the servo
amplifier. The voltage of VCMD with respect to EC represents
the speed command voltage. (The speed command voltage is
enabled only while the *ENBL signal is on.)
Electrical characteristics
Output voltage : –10 V to +10 V
Output current : 2 mA
Output impedance : 100 ohms
2. *ENBL (output)
*ENBL is the enable signal for the servo amplifier. While this
signal is on (connected to 0V), the VCMD signal is enabled.
Power *ENBL
Mate
0V Servo amplifier
Semicon-
ductor
contact
Electrical characteristics
Maximum load current when output is on:
No more than 200 mA, including momentary values
Maximum output voltage when output is on:
6IL (volt), where IL: Load current
Withstand voltage when output is off:
No more than 24 V, including momentary values
Leakage current when output is off:
No more than 100 mA
3. OVL (input)
OVL is the overload alarm signal issued by the servo amplifier.
When this signal enters the release state (high level), the Power
Mate assumes that the servo system has entered the overload
state, and turns off the *PRDY and *ENBL signals for the axis.
If this signal is not used, connect OVL and 0V to each other (low
level).
When an overload alarm is issued, the servo amplifier must stop
the motor regardless of the state of the VCMD signal.
5V Power Mate
Servo amplifier
OVL Receiver
circuit
0V
211
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
Electrical characteristics
Absolute maximum rating
Item Sym- Specification Unit Supplement
bol
Input characteristics
Item Sym- Specification Unit Supplement
bol
The plus sign (+) of Iih and Iil represents the direction of flow into
the receiver, while the minus sign (–) represents the direction of
flow from the receiver.
NOTE
The input release state is also assumed to be the high level.
4. *PRDY (output)
*PRDY is the ready signal, issued by the Power Mate to the servo
amplifier. The electrical characteristics of this signal are the same
as those of *ENBL.
5. *VRDY (input)
*VRDY is the ready signal issued by the servo amplifier. When
the power to the servo amplifier is turned on to set the normal
startup state, and the *PRDY signal from the Power Mate is
subsequently turned on, the servo amplifier must immediately
turn on (short–circuit) the *VRDY signal. If the servo amplifier
encounters an error, the *VRDY signal must be turned off
(released) to report the error to the Power Mate. If this signal is
not used, connect *VRDY and 0V to each other (low level), and
set bit 1 (CVR) of parameter No. 1800 to 1.
If the servo amplifier encounters an error, stop the motor
regardless of the state of the VCMD signal.
The electrical characteristics of this signal are the same as those
of OVL.
6. PD, *PD (input), PREQ, *PREQ (output)
These signals are serial pulse coder interface signals, converted
by the parallel/serial interface conversion unit.
7. A, *A, B, *B, Z, *Z
These signals are received from the pulse coder.
D A–phase and B–phase signals (A, *A, B, *B)
The A–phase and B–phase signals are shifted by 90 degrees
relative to each other, and are used to transfer incremental
position information. A position is detected, assuming that
the direction of movement is positive while the B–phase
signal is advanced, or that the direction of movement is
negative while the A–phase signal is advanced.
212
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–phase signal
A–phase signal
B–phase signal
TD y 280ns
a
A / *A
0. 5V
*A / A
b
B / *B
0. 5V
*B / B
TD
213
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
Parallel/serial interface
conversion unit
*Z
CN1 (15)
0V
CN1 (1, 2 or 3)
214
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
01 11
02 12
03 VCMD 13
04 EC 14 0V
K1
05 OVL 15 PD
06 0V 16 *PD Connector
PCR–E20FS
07 *ENBL 17 PREQ Connector case
PCR–V20LB
08 0V 18 *PREQ
09 *VRDY 19 0V
10 *PRDY 20 0V
External 5 V power K2
supply
215
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
Details of cable K1
Maximum allowable cable length: 50 m (between the Power
Mate and analog servo amplifier)
Power Mate
Connector panel
JS3 to JS6
VCMD VCMD
Individually 03
shielded twisted EC EC
pair #24AWG 04
*ENBL *ENBL
07
0V 0V
08
OVL OVL To analog ser-
05 vo amplifier
0V 0V
06
*PRDY *PRDY
10
0V 0V
20
*VRDY *VRDY
Twisted pair 09
#24AWG 0V 0V
19
PD PD
15
*PD *PD
16
PREQ PREQ To parallel/serial in-
17 terface conversion
unit
*PREQ *PREQ
18
0V 0V
14
Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0206 (Individually shielded twisted pair #24AWG x 3 pairs + twisted pair #24AWG x 7 pairs)
The external cable diameter is f11, preventing the use of the cable, as is, with connector case PCR–
V20LB (f8). Peel back the sheath at the point where the cable meets the connector to reduce the cable
diameter.
NOTE
When OVL or *VRDY is not used, connect it to 0V.
216
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
Details of cable K2
+5V +5V
External 5V
Connector
power sup-
0V 0V panel
ply
01 PD 11
02 *PD 12 0V
03 13
04 14 0V
K3
05 PREQ 15
06 *PREQ 16 0V
Connector
FI–40–2015S 07 17
Case
FI–20–CV 08 18 +5V
09 +5V 19
10 20 +5V
217
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
Details of cable K3
CN2
PD PD
01
From JSn of Power *PD *PD
Mate–H 02
#24AWG
PREQ PREQ twisted pair
05
*PREQ *PREQ
06
0V 0V
12
0V 0V
14
0V 0V
16
#20AWG
From external 5 V +5V +5V
power supply 09
+5V +5V
18
+5V +5V
20
Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0286
(#20AWG x 6 + #24AWG x 3 pairs, group shielded cable)
Maximum allowable cable length: 50 m
Note that the maximum length is limited by the voltage drop caused
by the resistance of the power cable.
1. Parallel/serial interface conversion unit
For each parallel/serial interface conversion unit, 5 VDC 5%,
250 mA must be supplied through connector CN2.
2. Pulse encoder
When a pulse encoder operating on 5 V is used via the
parallel/serial interface conversion unit, the power required by
the pulse encoder must be supplied.
218
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
01 0V 14 Z
08
02 0V 15 *Z
09
03 0V 16 A K4
10
Connector
04 +5V 17 *A MR–20LF
11 (HONDA
05 +5V 18 B TSUSHIN
12 KOGYO
06 +5V 19 *B CO., LTD.)
13
07 20
219
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
Details of cable K4
Maximum allowable cable length: 50 m
A A
16
*A *A
17
B B
18
#24AWG *B *B
twisted pair 19
Z Z
14
*Z *Z
15
+5V +5V
04
+5V +5V
05
+5V +5V
06
#20AWG 0V 0V
01
0V 0V
02
0V 0V
03
#24AWG 08
#24AWG 09
Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0286
(#20AWG x 6 + #24AWG x 3 pairs, group shielded cable)
NOTE
Always connect pin 08 with pin 09.
220
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
7.14.5
Parallel/Serial Interface 1) Specifications
Conversion Unit Item Specifications
221
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
max. SP2
110
mm SP3
max. 110 mm
Number of position No.2024 As with the digital servo system, set the
pulses number of pulses per motor revolution
(before DMR).
Reference counter No.1821 As with the digital servo system, set the
number of pulses per motor revolution (after
DMR).
222
II. PMC INTERFACE
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 1. ADDRESS LIST
1 ADDRESS LIST
G000 to X000 to
F000 to Y000 to
225
1. ADDRESS LIST PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G004 FIN
G053 UNIT
226
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 1. ADDRESS LIST
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G134 –MIT6 –MIT5 –MIT4 –MIT3 –MIT2 –MIT1
227
1. ADDRESS LIST PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G181 EIF15D EIF14D EIF13D EIF12D EIF11D EIF10D EIF9D EIF8D
G205 LED09
G212 SKIPP
G213 ACT
228
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 1. ADDRESS LIST
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G239 EMSBKF EC6F EC5F EC4F EC3F EC2F EC1F EC0F
229
1. ADDRESS LIST PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F000 OP SA STL SPL RWD
F002 CUT
F004 MZRN
F007 MF
F110 MDTCH6MDTCH5MDTCH4MDTCH3MDTCH2MDTCH1
F131 EMFA
F134 EMFB
230
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 1. ADDRESS LIST
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F135 EM28B EM24B EM22B EM21B EM18B EM14B EM12B EM11B
F137 EMFC
F140 EMFD
F210 K7 K6 K5 K4 K3 K2 K1 K0
F217 KX KR KG KN KO
F218 KSHRP KT KS KM KF
F229 EMFE
231
1. ADDRESS LIST PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
F232 EMFF
232
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 2. SIGNAL LIST
2 SIGNAL LIST
233
2. SIGNAL LIST PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
2.1
I/O SIGNAL LIST
(ORDER OF GROUP)
Signal
direction
Refer-
Group Signal name Symbol (address) CNC CNC ence
± °
PMC PMC
*1 CNC ready signal MA (F001#7) Ę 3.1
Servo ready signal SA (F000#6) Ę 3.2
*2 Emergency stop signal *ESP (G008#4, X000#4, X1000#4) Ę 4.1
External reset signal ERS (G008#7) Ę 4.2
Reset & rewind signal RRW (G008#6) Ę 4.3
*3 Alarm signal AL (F001#0) Ę 5.1
Battery alarm signal BAL (F001#2) Ę 5.2
Reset signal RST (F001#1) Ę 5.3
Rewinding signal RWD (F000#0) Ę 5.4
Moving direction signals MVDn (F106) Ę 5.5
In-position signals INPn (F104) Ę 5.6
Alarm classification signals ALPS1–ALPS3, ALPS, ALOT, ALOH, Ę 5.7
ALSV, ALAPC, ALPS4 (F250#0–#6, F251#0, #2)
APC alarm type signals APCMn, APOVn, APFEn, APPEn, APPSn, Ę 5.8
APBZn, APBVn, APBLn, (F236 to F241)
Dispaly of alarms from PMC PALM, PAL0–PAL6 (G225) Ę 5.9
Axis status signals INPn, SUPn, IPLn Ę 5.10
(F104) (F220#1 to F225#1) (F220#2 to F225#2)
Axis moving signal MVn (F102) Ę 5.11
*4 Mode select signal MD1 (G043#0), MD2 (G043#1), Ę 6.1
MD4 (G043#2)
Manual data input (MDI) signal MMDI (F003#3) Ę 6.2
Automatic operation (AUTO) signal MAUT (F003#5) Ę 6.2
Memory edit (EDIT) signal MEDT (F003#6) Ę 6.2
Handle mode (MH) signal MH (F003#1) Ę 6.2
Jog feed (JOG) signal MJ (F003#2) Ę 6.2
Manual reference position return signal MZRN (F004#5) Ę 6.2
TEACH IN JOG confirmation signal MTCHIN (F003#7), MJ (F003#2) Ę 6.2
TEACH IN STEP confirmation signal MTCHIN (F003#7), MH (F003#1) Ę 6.2
*5 Feed axis direction select signal +Jn (G100), –Jn (G102) Ę 7.1
Manual feedrate override signal *JV0–*JV15 (G010 ,G011) Ę 7.2
Manual rapid traverse select signal RT (G019#7) Ę 7.3
Rapid traverse override signal ROV1 (G014#0), ROV2 (G014#1) Ę 7.4
Manual absolute signal *ABSM (G006#2) Ę 7.5
234
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 2. SIGNAL LIST
Signal
direction
Refer-
Group Signal name Symbol (address) CNC CNC ence
± °
PMC PMC
*8 Manual reference position return selection signal ZRN (G043#7) Ę 10.1
Reference position return deceleration signal *DECn (X002, X1002) 10.1
Reference position return end signal ZPn (F094) Ę 10.1
2nd reference position return end signal ZP2n (F096) Ę 10.2
3rd reference position return end signal ZP3n (F098) Ę 10.2
Reference position establishment signal ZRFn (F120) Ę 10.3
Dogless Reference Position setting and return ZRn (G206#4 to G211#4) Ę 10.4
ZPn (F094) Ę
External setting signal of the reference point ZPExTn (G206#6 to G211#6) Ę 10.5
Reference point setting function by pressing axis CLRCHn (F180) Ę 10.6
to stopper
*9 Memory protection key KEY1, KEY2, KEY3, KEY4 (G046#3–#6) Ę 11
*10 Cycle start signal ST (G007#2) Ę 12.1
Feed hold signal *SP (G008#5) Ę 12.2
Cycle start lamp signal STL (F000#5) Ę 12.3
Feed hold lamp signal SPL (F000#4) Ę 12.4
Automatic operation signal OP (F000#7) Ę 12.5
Workpiece number search signal PN0–PN7 (G009) Ę 12.6
Machine lock signal MLK (G044#1) Ę 12.7
Single block signal SBK (G046#1) Ę 12.8
Dry run signal DRN (G046#7) Ę 12.9
Override signal *FV0–*FV7 (G012) Ę 12.10
Override cancel signal OVC (G006#4) Ę 12.11
Optional block skip signal BDT1 (G044#0) Ę 12.12
BDT2–BDT9 (G045)
Mirror image signal MIn (G106#0–#5) Ę 12.13
*11 Signals in cutting mode CUT (F202#6) Ę 13
*12 Screen state signals DPL0, DPL1, DPL2 (F254#0–#2) Ę 14
*13 Miscellaneous function strobe signal MF (F007#0) Ę 15.1
Miscellaneous function code signal M00–M31 (F010–F013), Ę 15.1
Completion signal FIN (G004#3) Ę 15.1
High-speed M/S/T interface signal MFIN (G005#0) Ę 15.1
Distribution end signal DEN (F001#3) Ę 15.2
M decode signals DM00, DM01, DM02, DM30 (F009#7–#4) Ę 15.3
Auxiliary function lock signal AFL (G005#6) Ę 15.4
Waiting function WFN1–WFN4 (F214#0–#3) Ę 15.5
WAT1–WAT4 (G209#0–#3) Ę 15.5
Simultaneous block start M821–M827 15.6
*15 PMC key data reference function K0, K1, K2, K3, K4, K5, K6, K7, K8, K9, KMNS, Ę 16
KPRD, KNO, KSLH, KEOB, KCAN, KALT, KINS,
KDLT, KINP, KWRT, KRED, KPOS, KPRG,
KVAR, KPRM, KALM, KDWN, KUP, KP, KQ, KH,
KO, KN, KG, KR, KX, KF, KM, KS, KT, KSHRP
(F210–F218)
235
2. SIGNAL LIST PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
Signal
direction
Refer-
Group Signal name Symbol (address) CNC CNC ence
± °
PMC PMC
*16 Software limit external setting +LMn (G110) Ę 17
–LMn (G112)
RLSOT (G007#7)
*17 Skip signals SKIP, SKIP2, SKIP3, SKIP4 Ę 18
(X000#0, #1, #2, #7), (X1000#0, #1, #2, #7)
SKIPP (G212#7)
*18 Servo off signal SVFn (G126) Ę 19.1
Follow-up signal *FLWU (G007#5) Ę 19.2
Servo position deviation monitor signal SVERn (F220#3 to F225#3) Ę 19.3
*19 I/O device external control function EXRD (G058#1), EXSTP (G058#2), Ę 20
EXWT (G058#3), EXPRG (G251#4) ,
EVAR (G251#5), EPARM (G251#6),
EDGN (G251#7),
EDG0–EDG15 (G252, G253)
EDN0–EDN15 (G254, G255)
RPBSY (F053#2), RPALM (F053#3), Ę
BGEACT (F053#4)
*20 External pulse input function EPCON (G066#6), HS1A, HS1B, HS1C Ę 21
(G018#0, #1, #2), MP1, MP2 (G019#4, #5)
*21 FANUC I/O Link slave function SDI00–SDI63 (X1020–) 22
SDO00–SDO63 (Y1020–)
IOLNK (G251#0) Ę
*22 Custom macro signal UI0–UI15 (G054, G055) Ę 23.1
UO0–UO131 (F054–F059) Ę
Interruption signal for custom macro UINT (G053#3) Ę 23.2
*23 Temporary interrupt detection signal ACT (G213#7) Ę 24
*24 Control axis selection signal EC0α to EC6α (G143#0 to #6) (G155#0 to #6) Ę 25
(G167#0 to #6) (G179#0 to #6)
(G227#0 to #6) (G239#0 to #6)
α : A, B, C, D, E, F
Axis control command completed signal EBUFα (G142#7) (G154#7) (G166#7) Ę
(G178#7) (G226#7) (G238#7)
Axis control command read signal EBSYα (F130#7) (F133#7) (F136#7) Ę
(F139#7) (F228#7) (F231#7)
Reset signal ECLRα (G142#6) (G154#6) (G166#6) Ę
(G178#6) (G226#6) (G238#6)
Axis control temporary stop signal ESTPα (G142#5) (G154#5) (G166#5) Ę
(G178#5) (G226#5) (G238#5)
Servo off signal ESOFα (G142#4) (G154#4) (G166#4) Ę
(G178#4) (G226#4) (G238#4)
Block stop signal ESBKα (F142#3) (F154#3) (F166#3) Ę
(F178#3) (F226#3) (F238#3)
Block stop disable signal EMSBKα (F143#7) (F155#7) (F167#7) Ę
(F179#7) (F227#7) (F239#7)
Auxiliary function BCD code EM11α to EM28α (F132) (F135) (F138) Ę
(F141) (F230) (F233)
Auxiliary function read signal EMFα (F131#0) (F134#0) (F137#0) Ę
(F140#0) (F229#0) (F232#0)
Auxiliary function completion signal EFINα (G142#0) (G154#0) (G166#0) Ę
(G178#0) (G226#0) (G238#0)
236
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 2. SIGNAL LIST
Signal
direction
Refer-
Group Signal name Symbol (address) CNC CNC ence
± °
PMC PMC
*24 Feedrate EIF0α to EIF15α (G144, G145) (G156, G157) Ę 25
(G168, G169) (G180, G181)
(G228, G229) (G240, G241)
Axis move distance EID0α to EID31α Ę
Dwell time (G146 to G149) (G158 to G161)
Auxiliary function code (G170 to G173) (G182 to G185)
(G230 to G233) (G242 to G245)
In–position signal EINPα (F130#0) (F133#0) (F136#0) Ę
(F139#0) (F228#0) (F231#0)
Following zero checking signal ECKZα (F130#1) (F133#1) (F136#1) Ę
(F139#1) (F228#1) (F231#1)
Alarm signal EIALα (F130#2) (F133#2) (F136#2) Ę
(F139#2) (F228#2) (F231#2)
Axis moving signal EGENα (F130#4) (F133#4) (F136#4) Ę
(F139#4) (F228#4) (F231#4)
Auxiliary function executing signal EDENα (F130#3) (F133#3) (F136#3) Ę
(F139#3) (F228#3) (F231#3)
Negative–direction overtravel signal EOTNα (F130#6) (F133#6) (F136#6) Ę
(F139#6) (F228#6) (F231#6)
Positive–direction overtravel signal EOTPα (F130#5) (F133#5) (F136#5) Ę
(F139#5) (F228#5) (F231#5)
Control axis selection signal EAXn (G136#0 to #5) Ę
Control axis selection status signal *EAXSL (F129#7) Ę
Override signal *FV0E to *FV7E (G151) Ę
Override cancellation signal OVCE (G150#5) Ę
Rapid traverse override signal ROV1E, ROV2E (G150#0, #1) Ę
Dry run signal DRNE (G150#7) Ę
Manual rapid traverse signal RTE (G150#6) Ę
Override 0% signal EOV0 (F129#5) Ę
*25 Torque limit enable signal TRQ1E, TRQ2E, TRQ3E, TRQ4E, TRQ5E, Ę 26.4
TRQ6E (G216#0 to #5)
Torque limit signal TRQn0 to TRQn7 (G217 to G222) 26.4
*26 Speed control servo alarm ignore signal IGNVRY (G66#0) Ę 27
*27 Axis detach signal DTCHn (G124#0 to #5) Ę 28.1
Axis detaching signal MDTCHn (F110#0 to #5) Ę 28.2
*28 Speed changing signal EXFn (X000#, #1, #2, X011#4, #5) 29
(X1000#0, #1, #2)
*29 Return signal RTN1n (G206#0 to G211#0) Ę 30
RTN2n (G206#1 to G211#1)
RTN3n (G206#2 to G211#2)
*30 V–READY waiting signal WVRDY (F209#4) Ę 31
*31 Handy Operator’s panel SW1 to SW13, M–OPE, SW15 to SW61 Ę 33
(F168 to F175)
LED01 to LED09 (G204 to G205) Ę
237
2. SIGNAL LIST PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
2.2
I/O SIGNAL LIST
(ORDER OF
SYMBOL)
Symbol Signal name PMC address Reference
*ABSM Manual absolute signal G006#2 7.5
ACT Temporary interrupt detection signal G213#7 24
AFL Auxiliary function lock signal G005#6 15.4
AL Alarm signal F001#0 5.1
ALAPC APC alarm F251#0 5.7
ALOH Over heat alarm F250#5 5.7
ALOT Over travel alarm signal (alarm classification signal) F250#4 5.7
ALPS P/S alarm signal (alarm classification signal) F250#3 5.7
ALPS1 P/S alarm 100 signal (alarm classification signal) F250#0 5.7
ALPS2 P/S alarm 000 signal (alarm classification signal) F250#1 5.7
ALPS3 P/S alarm 101 signal (alarm classification signal) F250#2 5.7
ALPS4 P/S alarm (from 5000 to 5999) F251#2 5.7
ALSV Servo alarm signal (alarm classification signal) F250#6 5.7
APBL1 to APBL6 APC battery LOW alarm 2 signal (APC alarm type signal) F236#7 to F241#7 5.8
APBV1 to APBV6 APC battery LOW alarm 1 signal (APC alarm type signal) F236#6 to F241#6 5.8
APBZ1 to APBZ6 APC battery zero alarm signal (APC alarm type signal) F236#5 to F241#5 5.8
APCM1 to APCM6 APC communication error signal (APC alarm type signal) F236#0 to F241#0 5.8
APFE1 to APFE6 APC framing error signal (APC alarm type signal) F236#2 to F241#2 5.8
APOV1 to APOV6 APC over time error signal (APC alarm type signal) F236#1 to F241#1 5.8
APPE1 to APPE6 APC parity error signal (APC alarm type signal) F236#3 to F241#3 5.8
APPS1 to AAPS6 APC pulse miss error signal (APC alarm type signal) F236#4 to F241#4 5.8
BAL Battery alarm signal F001#2 5.2
BDT1, BDT2 to BDT9 Optional block skip signal G044#0, G045 12.12
BGEACT Background editing signal (I/O device external control signal) F053#4 20
CLRCH 1 to 6 Torque limit condition signal F180#0 to #5 10.6
CUT Signal under cutting mode F002#6 13
*DEC1 to *DEC6 Reference position return deceleration signal X002#0 to #5 10.1
X1002#0 to #5
DEN Distribution end signal F001#3 15.2
DM00, DM01, DM02, DM30 M decode signals F009#7 to #4 15.3
DPL0 to DPL2 Screen status signal F254#0 to #2 14
DRN Dry run signal G046#7 12.9
DRNE Dry run signal (Axis control by PMC) G150#7 25
DTCH 1 to 6 Control axis detach signal G124#0 to #5 28.1
EAX1 to EAX6 Controlled axis selection signal (Axis control by PMC) G136# to #5 25
*EAXSL Control axis selection status signal (Axis control by PMC) F129#7 25
EBSYA to EBSYF Axis control command read signal (Axis control by PMC) F130#7, F133#7, 25
F136#7, F139#7,
F228#7, F231#7
EBUFA to EBUFF Axis control command completed signal (Axis control by PMC) G142#7, G154#7, 25
G166#7, G178#7,
G226#7, G238#7
238
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 2. SIGNAL LIST
239
2. SIGNAL LIST PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
240
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 2. SIGNAL LIST
241
2. SIGNAL LIST PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
242
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 3. READY SIGNALS
3 READY SIGNALS
243
3. READY SIGNALS PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
3.1 When power is applied to the Power Mate, this signal MA turns to “1”.
CNC READY SIGNAL
(OUTPUT)
MA<F001#7>
3.2 When the servo system becomes operative, the servo ready signal SA
turns to “1”. For axes that must be braked on the machine side, the brake
SERVO READY should not be released until this signal is sent.
SIGNAL (OUTPUT) Fig. 3.2 shows the time chart of this signal.
SA <F000#6>
CNC ready MA
signal MA 60 - 100msec
SA
Servo ready
signal
Brake ON
Servo alarm Servo alarm
(Overload)
Reset
Reset Emergency stop
1 - 2 sec Approx. 1 sec
244
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 4. RESET & EMERGENCY STOP
245
4. RESET & EMERGENCY STOP PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
4.1 When the emergency stop signal *ESP turns to “0”, the emergency stop
is applied to the machine and the Power Mate is reset. This signal is
EMERGENCY STOP controlled by the B contacts of a pushbutton switch. The emergency stop
SIGNAL (INPUT) *ESP signal turns the servo ready signal (SA[3.2]) to “0”.
<X000#4, X1000#4, Overtravel detection by this Power Mate is handled by the software limit
G008#4> function, and a limit switch for normal overtravel detection is not needed.
To prevent the machine from moving beyond the software limit through
servo feedback error, always install a stroke end limit switch (shown in
Fig. 4.1 below).
Power Mate
Emergency stop limit switch
Emergency stop
+n –X +X
24V
24V
246
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 4. RESET & EMERGENCY STOP
WARNING
Software limit setting point and operating point of limit switch
for emergency stop
The stop point by the software limit goes beyond the setting
point by as much as the following distance.
R
(mm)
7,500
R : Rapid traverse rate (mm/min)
This means that the actual stop point may exceed the set
point by a maximum of R/7,500 (mm) due to the rapid
traverse rate set by parameter No. 1420. Set the limit switch
for emergency stop including the allowance for the above
value.
Software limit setting point
ÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄ
R
ÄÄÄÄÄ
7,500
247
4. RESET & EMERGENCY STOP PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
4.2 The Power Mate can be reset by turning the external reset signal ERS to
“1”. The reset signal RST[5.3] turns to “1” at the same time. When an
EXTERNAL RESET M[15.1] function is being executed, MF[15.1] signal is reset within 100
SIGNAL (INPUT) ERS msec after the external reset signal is input.
<G008#7>
4.3
RESET & REWIND Function Resets the Power Mate and rewinds the input device being used
for the selected automatic operation.
SIGNAL (INPUT) RRW
Operation
<G008#6>
The Power Mate operates as follows when signal RRW turns to
“1”.
i) The moving control axis decelerates to a stop.
ii) After stopping, the CNC is reset and the reset signal RST
[5.3] turns to “1”.
iii) While the reset operation takes place, the selected main
program is rewound the rewind signl turns to “1” and
rewinding begins. (Only at AUTO mode).
iv) Neither automatic nor manual operaitons are conducted
while the RRW signal is set to “1”.
Usage Normaly, Power Mate is reset by M30 (End of tape). To rewind
the program at the same time, set this signal to l with using M30
decode signal.
248
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 5. STATUS SIGNALS
5 STATUS SIGNALS
249
5. STATUS SIGNALS PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
5.3 The CNC reset signal RST turns to “1” for any of the following reasons:
RESET SIGNAL (1) While RESET button on the CRT/MDI panel or separate type MDI
is being pressed.
(OUTPUT) RST
(2) While the external reset signal ERS[4.2] turns to “1”.
<F001#1>
(3) While the emergency stop signal *ESP[4.1] turns to “0”.
(4) While reset & rewind signal RRW [4.3] turns to “1”.
The machine tool operator can activate this signal to allow it to reset on
the ladder.
The RST signal output time is extended to prevent the PMC from failing
to read a signal. The extention time can be set in units of 16 msec using
parameter No. 3017. The RST signal output time is obtained by:
(Reset processing time)+(parameter value) 16 msec.
Reset ON
Reset
Processing
RST signal
NOTE
Reset processing time requires at least 16 msec. This time
will be longer on optional configurations.
250
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 5. STATUS SIGNALS
5.4 Function Indicates that the Power Mate is executing the rewinding
operation.
REWINDING SIGNAL
Output conditions
(OUTPUT) RWD
The signal turns to “1” when the reset & rewind signal RRW
<F000#0> [4.3] has turned to “1”.
However, if can be modified by setting parameter No. 3001#2
(RWM) to “0” so that this signal is not output.
The signal turns to “0” when more than 100 msec has passed
after the signal has turned to “1” in reset & rewind signal RRW
[4.3].
NOTE
The rewinding time required for a main program in memory
is nearly zero. Rewinding of the main program has ended
when the rewinding signal has turned to “0”.
5.5 Function These signals indicate the movement direction of control axis.
They are provided for each control axis, and the number in the
MOVING DIRECTION signal name corresponds to the control axis number.
SIGNALS MVDn MVD n The moving direction of the nth axis is minus.
<F106> (n : 1 to 6)
Output conditions
“1” indicates the corresponding axes are moving in the minus
direction, and “0” indicates they are moving in the plus
direction.
NOTE
1 These signals are output in both automatic and manual
operations.
2 These signals maintain their existing condition during a
stop, indicating the direction of the axes’ movement before
being stopped.
251
5. STATUS SIGNALS PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
5.6 Function These signals indicate that the control axes are set to the
in-position condition.
IN-POSITION They are provided for each control axis, and the number in the
SIGNALS INPn signal name corresponds to the control axis number.
<F104> INP n The actual machine position of the n–th axis is set to
the in–position condition.
(n : 1 to 6)
Output conditions
These signals turn to “1” in the following case :
D The acceleration/deceleration delay of the corresponding
control axis is zero and the servo error is within the specified
allowance.
These signals turn to “0” in the following cases :
D The acceleration/deceleration delay of the corresponding
control axis is not zero.
D The servo error of the corresponding control axis exceeds the
specified allowance.
NOTE
The in-position signals may turn to “1” even during the
movement if the axis is fed at very low speed.
Relative parameter
No.1801, 1826, 1827
252
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 5. STATUS SIGNALS
253
5. STATUS SIGNALS PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
5.8 The Absolute Pulse Coder (APC) alarm type is output to the PMC.
APC ALARM TYPE [Signal] APCMn
SIGNALS (OUTPUT) [Function] APC communication error. Data transfer error (alarm 301)
APCMn, APOVn, [Signal] APOVn
APFEn, APPEn, [Function] APC overtime error. Data transfer error (alarm 302)
APPSn, APBZn, [Signal] APFEn
[Function] APC framing error. Data transfer error (alarm 303)
APBVn, APBLn
<F236 TO F241> [Signal] APPEn
[Function] APC parity error. Data transfer error (alarm 304)
[Signal] APPSn
[Function] APC pulse error. APC alarm (alarm 305)
[Signal] APBZn
[Function] The APC battery voltage has ever dropped to a level too
low to hold data. APC alarm (alarm 306)
[Signal] APBVn
[Function] The APC battery voltage has dropped to a level necessitat-
ing the battery to be changed. APC alarm (alarm 307)
[Signal] APBLn
[Function] The APC battery voltage has ever dropped (including pow-
er OFF) to a level necessitating the battery to be changed.
APC alarm (alarm 308)
(n : 1 to 6)
5.9 Alarms in the 3000 bracket can be generated from PMC to Power Mate.
DISPLAY OF [Signal] PALM
ALARMS FROM PMC [Function] PMC alarm generation selection signal
1: Alarms in the 3000 bracket are generated from PMC.
(INPUT) PAL0 TO 0: Alarms in the 3000 bracket are not generated from
PAL6, PALM <G225> PMC.
[Signal] PAL0-PAL6
[Function] Alarm number specification signal
Values in excess of 3000 among binary numbers displayed
by PAL0 to PAL6 become alarm numbers.
NOTE
When an alarm has been generated from PMC the 2 bits of
the alarm classification signals ALPS and ALOT [5.8]
become 1.
254
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 5. STATUS SIGNALS
5.10 Status of the axis under Power Mate control is output by INPn, SUPn and
IPLn signals.
AXIS STATUS Timing is shown in Fig. 5.10.
SIGNAL (OUTPUT)
INPn : (n : 1 to 6) Turns “1” at the in-position state.
INPn<F104#0>, SUPn SUPn : (n : 1 to 6) Is “1” while command pulses are in the acceleration/
<F220#1 TO F225#1>, deceleration control section.
IPLn <F220#2 TO IPLn : (n : 1 to 6) Is “1” while command pulses are in the interpolater.
F225#2>
Axis move command ĘĘĘ
INPn
IPLn
SUPn
255
5. STATUS SIGNALS PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
5.11
AXIS IN–MOTION [Classification] Output signal
SIGNAL MVn<F102> [Function] These signals indicate that the control axes are in
motion. An axis in–motion signal is available for
each control axis; a number added at the end of the
signal name indicates the corresponding control
axis.
Mvn
1…The first axis is in motion.
2…The second axis is in motion.
3…The third axis is in motion.
..
..
6…The sixth axis is in motion.
[Output condition] MVn is set to 1 in any of the following cases:
D When the corresponding axis has started motion
D When the corresponding handle feed axis has
been selected in the manual handle feed mode
MVn is set to 0 in any of the following cases:
D When the distribution for the move command
for the corresponding axis has stopped (in the
case where bit 6 (MVX) of parameter No. 3003
is set to 0)
D When deceleration on the corresponding axis
has stopped, and the in–position condition is set,
or when deceleration has stopped if no
in–position check is made (in the case where bit
6 (MVX) of parameter No. 3003 is set to 1)
256
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 6. MODE SELECT
6 MODE SELECT
257
6. MODE SELECT PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
6.1 The mode select signal is a code signal consisting three bits MD1, MD2,
and MD4. The seven modes memory edit (EDIT), automatic operation
MODE SELECT (AUTO), step feed (STEP), manual continuous feed (JOG), TEACH IN
SIGNAL (INPUT) MD1, JOG, TEACH IN STEP, manual data input (MDI) mode can be selected
MD2, MD4 <G043#0 by combining these bits.
TO #2> Contact at the machine
Mode side
MD1 MD2 MD4
1 Memory edit (EDIT) Ę Ę
2 Automatic operation (AUTO) Ę
3 Step feed (STEP) Ę
4 Manual continuous feed (JOG) Ę Ę
5 TEACH IN STEP Ę Ę Ę
6 TEACH IN JOG Ę Ę
7 Manual data input (MDI)
Ę: Turns to “1”
: Turns to “0”
Cautions about Modes and Mode switching
(1) Switch the mode while the operation is stopped or halt (See Chapter
12).
(2) The mode cannot be switched during an emergency stop.
(3) Manual Operation at TEACH IN JOG and TEACH IN STEP
D TEACH IN JOG
Manual continuous feed can be performed.
D TEACH IN STEP
Step feed can be performed.
In the TEACH IN JOG and TEACH IN STEP modes, program edit is
possible in addition to the operations above.
(4) If the step feed mode or the TEACH IN STEP mode is selected during
operation in the automatic operation mode, the operation stops and
the signal STL [12.3] turns OFF as well as the signal SPL [12.4] turns
ON to assume the step feed mode or the TEACH IN STEP mode. The
step feed by the feed axis direction select signal +Jn, –Jn, (n : 1 to 6)
[7.1] is possible in this condition. It is also possible to select the
automatic operation mode again and to restart the operation by the
automatic operation start signal in this condition since the command
in the automatic operation mode is held. It is impossible to restart
unless the same mode as before the interruption is selected, however,
if the operation was interrupted by switching to the step feed mode
during operation in the automatic operation mode. (Fig. 6.1(a))
258
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 6. MODE SELECT
Step feed or
TEACH IN STEP
Operation in automatic
operation mode
Step feed enable
STL
SPL
ST
Start signal
Fig.6.1 (a)
(5) If the manual continuous feed mode or the TEACH IN JOG mode is
selected during operation in the automatic operation mode, the
operation is interrupted and the signal STL [12.3] turns OFF as well
as the signal SPL [12.4] turns ON to assume the manual continuous
feed mode or the TEACH IN JOG mode. Manual continuous feed by
the feed axis direction select signal is possible in this condition.
It is also possible to restart in this condition by returning to the
original condition just as in the aforementioned step feed and TEACH
IN STEP. Also the step feed command is ignored and the manual
continuous feed mode is selected if the mode is switched to the
manual continuous feed mode or the TEACH IN JOG mode during
operation by step feed. Any feed axis direction select signal which
happens to be close before the manual continuous feed mode or the
TEACH IN JOG mode is selected is ignored, however. Turn all the
feed axis direction select signals +Jn, –Jn, (n : 1 to 6) [7.1] open once
and then turn the required feed axis direction select signal close, and
that feed axis direction select signal will be selected. (Figs. 6.1 (b),
(c))
Operation in automatic
operation mode
Manual
STL continuous
feed enable
SPL
ST
Start signal
Fig.6.1 (b)
259
6. MODE SELECT PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
Manual Manual
continuous continuous
feed disable feed enable
Fig.6.1 (c)
260
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 6. MODE SELECT
6.2 These signals indicate the current operational mode. The relationship
between input and output signals is:
OPERATION MODE
CONFIRMATION Table 6.2 Relationship between Input and Output Signals
SIGNALS Input signal
Mode O tp t signal
Output
MD1 MD2 MD4 ZRN
Manaul data input (MDI) 0 0 0 0 MMDI<F003#3>
Auto operation (AUTO) 1 0 0 0 MAUT<F003#5>
Memory edit (EDIT) 1 1 0 0 MEDT<F003#6>
Handle mode (MH) 0 0 1 0 MH<F003#1>
Jogging (JOG) 1 0 1 0 MJ<F003#2>
Manual reference 1 0 1 1 MZRH<F004#5>
position return
TEACH IN JOG 0 1 1 0 MTCHIN<F003#7>,
MJ<F003#2>
TEACH IN STEP 1 1 1 0 MTCHIN<F003#7>,
MH<F003#1>
261
7. JOG FEED PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
7 JOG FEED
262
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 7. JOG FEED
7.1 These signals are enabled when INC, JOG, TEACH IN STEP or TEACH
IN JOG mode is selected. They indicate the feed axis and its feed
FEED AXIS direction.
DIRECTION SELECT +/– of signal name indicates the feed direction, the number following “J”
SIGNAL (INPUT) corresponds to the number of the controlled axis (see Fig.7.1 (a)):
+Jn, –Jn, <G100,
G102 > + J n
Fig.7.1
The above feed amount per step can be multiplied by 10, 100 or 1000 by
the incremental feed signal MP1, MP2 [9]. For details, refer to Section
9.
(2) Jog Feed
When the feed axis direction select signal (+Jn, –Jn) of the axis to be
moved turns from “0” to “1” after the JOG or TEACH IN JOG mode
has been selected, that axis moves in the pertinent direction at the feed
rate determined by the override signal or manual rapid traverse select
signal. When the feed axis direction select signal turns to “1” and the
JOG or TEACH IN JOG mode is subsequently selected, or the feed
axis direction select signal remains “1” and the RESET button or
EMERGENCY STOP button is pressed, the axis does not move until
the signal first turns to “0”, then back to “1”.
Simultaneous 3 axes are controled in jog feed.
263
7. JOG FEED PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
7.2 (Function)
MANUAL FEEDRATE A feedrate in jog feed or incremental feed can be overridden.
These sixteen binary code signals correspond to the override
OVERRIDE (INPUT) values as follows:
*JV0 TO
ȍ |2
15
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0.01
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0.10
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1.00
1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 10.00
1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 100.00
0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 400.00
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 655.34
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(Operation)
If rapid traverse selection signal RT[7.3] is “0” during jog feed
or incremental feed, the actual feedrate is obtained by
multiplying a jog feedrate set by a parameter (No.1423) by an
override value selected by these signals.
264
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 7. JOG FEED
7.3 If the jog feed or TEACH IN JOG mode is selected, setting the RT signal
to “1” switches tool movement from a jog feedrate to a rapid traverse rate.
MANUAL RAPID
Under the condition mentioned above, setting the feed axis direction
TRAVERSE SELECT selection signal (7.1) to ”1” moves the tool in the specified direction at
SIGNAL (INPUT) the rapid traverse rate. If the jog feed or TEACH IN JOG mode is selected,
RT<G019#7> the feed axis direction selection signal is ”1,” and the override signal is
in effect, setting the RT signal to ”1” causes the tool to move at the rapid
traverse rate. Resetting the RT signal to ”0” resumes the original feedrate.
(See Fig. 7.3.)
Axis movement
Rapid traverse
7.4 These signals override the rapid traverse rate, and correspond to:
RAPID TRAVERSE Table 7.4 Signals ROV1, 2 and Override
OVERRIDE SIGNAL
Rapid traverse override
(INPUT) ROV1, ROV2 Override value
val e
ROV2 ROV1
<G014#0, #1> 0 0 100 %
0 1 50 %
1 0 25 %
1 1 Fo % (NOTE)
NOTE
For Fo value, an absolute value is set by parameter
No.1421 within a range of 0 to rapid traverse rate (for each
axis).
Actual feed rate is obtained by multiplying the rapid traverse
rate preset by parameter No.1420 by the override value
determined by this signal, whether in automatic or manual
operation (including manual reference position return).
265
7. JOG FEED PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
7.5 This signal determines whether or not the move amount is counted to the
present position on the workpiece coordinate system when the machine
MANUAL ABSOLUTE tool is moved by the manual operation, whether jog or incremental feed.
SIGNAL (INPUT) (a) *ABSM = 0 ... (manual absolute on)
*ABSM <G006#2> When manual operation is interrupted under this condition during
automatic operation:
(i) At the end of the block where manual operation was
interrupted, the tool position moves in parallel by the manual
move amount, whether the command is incremental or
absolute.
(ii) In subsequent blocks, the parallel-moved tool position
remains unchanged until an absolute command block
appears. Therefore, if all blocks are programmed by
incremental commands, the tool keeps the parallel-moved
position until machining ends (Fig. 7.5 (a)).
Manual
intervention
End point
NOTE
If the machining end position has shifted by the manual
move amount because all blocks are programmed by
incremental commands only, the present value is displayed
shifted by the manual move amount.
266
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 7. JOG FEED
Manual
intervention
End point
The present value display at the finish of the operation shows an end point
value on the program as if manual intervention had not been executed.
However, the tool position moves in parallel.
267
8. INTERLOCK PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
8 INTERLOCK
268
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 8. INTERLOCK
8.1 There are two types of interlock functions. Set the parameter to use
high-speed interlock *RILK. (Parameter No.3003#1 (HITL))
INTERLOCK SIGNAL This signal is used to inhibit the machine from moving, and is effective
(INPUT) *IT<G008#0>, regardless of the selected mode. When the *IT or *RILK signal is “0”, the
*RILK<X000#6, axis movement is decelerated and stopped.
X1000#6> In automatic operation (cycle start lamp signal STL is “1”, feed hold lamp
signal SPL is “0”), blocks containing M, command is executed
consecutively until a block containing an axis move command is
encountered; the system then stops and is placed into the automatic
operation mode. When the *IT or *RILK signal turns to “1”, operation
resumes (Figs. 8.1 (a), (b)).
Command read
Axis move
*IT
Command read
MF
FIN
*IT
NOTE
The overtravel amount of the motor after turning *IT or
*RILK to “1” is represented by the following formula.
TC T
Qmax + F m. 1 ( ) S ) A )
60 1000 1000 1000
Where
Qmax : Overtravel quantity (mm or inch)
Fm : Feedrate (mm/min or inch/min)
Tc : Cutting time constant (msec)
Ts : Servo time constant (Ts = 33msec normally)
A : Processing time of Power Mate
A =30ms with standard interlock signal *IT
A =12ms with high speed interlock signal *RILK
269
8. INTERLOCK PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
8.3 Function
INTERLOCK SIGNAL This function allows a directional interlock for each axis.
Together with the high-speed interlock, it is possible to release
FOR EACH AXIS AND the interlock of an axis only in the direction in which no
DIRECTION (INPUT) axis/directional interlock is applied.
+MITn, –MITn <G132, Operation
G134> When the axis/directional interlock signal becomes “1”, Power
Mate applies interlock only in the corresponding axial
direction. However, during automatic operation, all axes will
stop.
270
9. INCREMENTAL FEED SIGNAL (INPUT)
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE MP1, MP2 <G019#4,#5>
9 <G019#4,#5>
Table.9
Status of signals Movement amount per step
Magnification
Metric input Inch input
of external
MP2 MP1 Incremental Incremental pulse input
feed feed
0 0 0.001 mm 0.0001 inch X1
0 1 0.01 mm 0.001 inch X10
1 0 0.1 mm 0.01 inch XM
1 1 1 mm 0.1 inch XN
NOTE
Magnification M and N are set by parameters
(No.7113,No.7114).
271
10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
272
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN
273
10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
Jog feed
JOG or TEACH IN JOG mode lock state
ZRN
+J1 +J1
Rapid
traverse
*DEC1 *DEC1
Grid
(1 revolution ZP1
signal)
Detector 1 revolution signal (X-axis return
direction +)
+J1
+V Rapid
traverse
Rapid
traverse
–V
Grid
ZP1
(X-axis return direction –)
274
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN
Reference position
+V
–V
When a mode other than JOG and TEACH IN JOG mode is selected or
the feed axis direction select signals (+J1, –J1, +J2, –J2) are all turned off
during reference position return, the machine decelerates and stops.
Reference position return must always feed toward the reference position
from a point outside the deceleration region. “Deceleration region”
means:
Point at which
*DEC1 turns to
“0” Reference position
Deceleration
region
Fig.10.1 (d)
A low, constant speed after deceleration can be specified for each axis by
using parameter No. 1425, within the range of 6 to 24,000 mm/min or 0.6
to 960 in/min.
Automatic reference position return to zero point return direction by G28
is performed by the same sequence as manual reference position return
only if manual/ automatic reference position return has never been
performed after turning power on, after emergency stop or after releasing
servo alarm. Once the reference position return is performed by the above
sequence, automatic reference position return is performed the same as
positioning to the reference position at rapid traverse and does not follow
the sequence described here, and the starting position of G28 command
is not limited.
275
10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
Feedrate
Return direction
VR
VL
Reference position
Deceleration limit Deceleration limit
switch operation point switch released point
L DW L DA
Fig.10.1 (e)
276
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN
6,000 1,000 1
60 1
E+ + 3, 333
30
Conversely, when detection unit is 1µm and servo loop gain is 30, the
feedrate with the servo position deviation of 128 is
F = 128 30 60 (mm) = 230,400 (µm/min) = 230 (mm/min)
By the above result, the machine should be moved toward the reference
position at a feedrate of more than 230 mm/min before the first reference
position return is performed.
The servo position error that occurs during actual feeding can be detected
using diagnose 300.
NOTE
Parameter No. 3001#3 (BIO) specifies whether the *DEC
signal is to be entered from the built–in I/O card or through
the FANUC I/O link from the I/O card or I/O unit. When the
signal is supplied from the built–in I/O card, parameter No.
3005#1 (BDEC) must also be specified.
277
10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
10.2
2ND, 3RD (1) 2nd reference point return end signals (output)
REFERENCE ZP2n <F096>
POSITION RETURN (2) 3rd reference point return end signals (output)
SIGNALS (OUTPUT) ZP3n <F098>
(a) Function
ZP2n, ZP3n <F096,
These signals indicate that the control axes are positioned at the
F098> 2nd or 3rd reference position. The signals are provided
independently for each axis; the number after ZP shows the
reference position number, while the second digit indicates the
control axis.
ZP 2 n
278
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN
10.4 This function moves the moving part of the machine by manual
continuous feed in the direction specified for each axis, then returns it to
DOGLESS the reference position without using the deceleration signal for reference
REFERENCE position return.
POSITION SETTING (a) Setting the reference position
SIGNAL (INPUT) ZRn (i) Position the axis near the reference position using manual
<G206#4, G211#4> continuous feed.
(ii) In the reference position return mode, enter the signal
specifying the feed axis direction [7.1], (+Jn) or (–Jn), for the
axis.
(iii) The axis is positioned at the grid closest to the current position,
and the position becomes the reference position.
(Example) When the reference position for the 1st axis is set
ZRN mode
+J1 or –J1
(PMC³NC)
1st axis
V
279
10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
JOG mode
MD4, MD2, MD1
ZRN
(Note2)
+Jn/–Jn or ZRn +X
+Jn/–Jn or ZRn ZRn (Note3) ZRn (Note3)
FL FL FL
Feed rate
Psotion
detector grid
1st reference point
setting by method 1.
NOTE
1 The 1st reference point setting can use any signal from +Jn,
–Jn, ZRn.
2 The axis is momery moved by one grid even if ZRn signal
is ON for a ling time.
280
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN
NOTE
1 If command G28 is issued before returning to the reference
position is performed, P/S alarm 90 is issued.
2 Issuing command G28 after the inch/millimeter conversion
command G20/G21 causes the machine to return to the
reference position at high speed.
3 When positioning the axis near the reference position, it is
necessary to move the axis in the reference position return
direction at a speed such that the positional deviation of the
servo exceeds 128.
4 The positioning direction from the point closest to the
reference position to the grid conforms to that set by
parameter ZMIx(No.1006 #5) regardless of the sign (+ or
–) of the signal specifying the feed axis direction.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1002 DLZ
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1005 DLZx
NOTE
When DLZ of parameter 1002 is 0, parameter 1005 is
enabled. When DLZ of parameter 1002 is 1, parameter
1005 is disabled, and the function for setting the reference
position without dogs is enabled for all axes.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ZMIx
281
10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1815 APCX APZx
CAUTION
When the absolute pulse coder is to be set to the origin
using this function, the APCx bit must be set to “1.”
NOTE
Setting the reference position external setting signal to “1”
causes this parameter to be set to “1.”
282
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN
(d) Alarm
No. Description
093 Reference position Because the reference position external setting
external setting signal was set to “1” under one of the following
failed. conditions, reference position external setting
failed.
1) The manual continuous feed mode (JOG)
has not been selected.
2) The manual continuous feed mode (JOG)
has been selected, but the ZRN signal is
“0.”
3) The emergency stop signal (*ESP) is “0.”
4) APCx (bit 5 of parameter No. 1815) is “0.”
NOTE
1 The reference position external setting signal is effective,
when the manual continuous feed mode (JOG) has been
selected, and the ZRN signal is “1.”
2 When this function is used to set the absolute pulse coder
to the origin, be sure to set the emergency stop signal
(*ESP) to “1.”
3 After the reference position has been set up for the absolute
pulse coder using this function, turn the power off and on
again.
4 This function is intended to set up the origin for the absolute
pulse coder. It cannot be used for the incremental pulse
coder.
283
10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
NOTE
This function is effective for the absolute pulse coder.
284
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN
NOTE
HS1A (G018#0), HS1B (G018#1), and HS1C (G018#2)
function as the external pulse input axis selection signal.
ÃÃÃÃ
Machine stopper
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
Current position
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
Machine stopper
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ The direction, speed, and torque for axis
movement are specified in parameters.
(ii) When the axis bumps into the machine stopper end, it
moves through the distance specified in a parameter in the
direction away from the machine stopper.
285
10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
ÃÃÃÃ
Machine stopper
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
The direction, speed, and torque for axis
movement are specified in parameters.
(iii) Steps (iv) and (v) are repeated from the position the axis
was moved back to, in order to maintain a constant speed
for axis movement in which the axis is pushed toward the
stopper.
(iv) The specified axis is pushed toward the machine stopper
with a limited–torque operation.
Until the axis bumps into the machine stopper, it moves:
In the direction specified in parameter No. 1006
At the speed specified in parameter No. 7184
With the torque specified in parameter No. 7186
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
Machine stopper
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ The direction, speed, and torque for axis
movement are specified in parameters.
(v) When the axis bumps into the machine stopper end, it
moves through the distance specified in a parameter in the
direction away from the machine stopper.
The axis moves back:
In the direction opposite to the one specified in parameter
No. 1006
Through the distance specified in parameter 7182
At the speed specified in parameter No. 7185
286
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN
ÃÃÃÃ
Reference position
Machine stopper
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
The direction, speed, distance, and torque for
axis movement are specified in parameters.
Parameter No. 7184 (speed at which the axis bumps into the
machine stopper during a limited–torque operation) should
be set with a value that matches the accuracy of the machine.
When the axis bumps into the machine stopper and is moved
back to a certain point through the distance specified in
parameter No. 7182, this point is set as the reference position
of that axis, and the reference position return completion
signals ZPn (F094#0 to #5) are output.
When the reference position return is completed, a PS alarm
(000) will occur. Turn the power off and on again.
2) After the reference position is set up
When the reference position has been set up (APZx (bit 4 of
parameter No. 1815) = 1, starting the cycle causes the axis
immediately to return to the reference position at a rapid traverse
rate without performing item 1).
(d) Parameter
Torque limit used during execution of the bump–type reference position
7186 setting cycle
NOTE
If the parameter is 0, the override value is assumed to be
100%.
287
10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
288
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN
Axis movement speed for reference position setting used during execution
7185 of the bump–type reference position setting cycle
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ZMIx
NOTE
When the reference position setting cycle operation is
started in the direction specified in ZMIx (bit 5 of parameter
No. 1006), the algebraic sign (direction of operation) of the
values specified in parameter Nos. 7181 and 7182 should
match the direction set in ZMIx (bit 5 of parameter No.
1006). If the directions do not match, the reference position
setting cycle operation cannot be activated even when a
start signal is entered.
(e) Signal
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F180 CLRCH6 CLRCH5 CLRCH4 CLRCH3 CLRCH2 CLRCH1
289
10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
ZRN mode
Automatic operation
start signal (input) ST
Cycle operation
Automatic operation
started signal (output) OP
Reference position
return completed signal
(output) ZPn N% (NOTE)
100% 100%
Torque limit
Bump direction
Axis speed
Return direction
NOTE
N%: Torque limit (%) specified in a parameter
290
11. MEMORY PROTECTION KEY
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE KEY1 TO KEY4 <G046#3-#6>
11 <G046#3Ć#6>
(a) Function
Enables the changing of the memory contents from the MDI panel.
Four signals are provided. The operations that can be performed on
the contents of memory by each signal vary depending on the setting
of bit 7 (KEY) of parameter No. 3290.
When KEY = 0
@ KEY1: Enables the input of tool compensation values.
@ KEY2: Enables the input of setting data and macro variables.
@ KEY3: Enables program loading and editing.
@ KEY4: (Reserved)
When KEY = 1
@ KEY1: Enables program loading and editing, as well as the
input of PMC parameters.
@ KEY2 to KEY4: Not used
(b) Operation
When a signal is set to 0, the associated operations are disabled.
When a signal is set to 1, the associated operations are enabled.
(c) Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G046 KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1
(d) Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3290 KEY
NOTE
The functions of the signals depend on whether KEY = 0 or
KEY = 1.
291
12. AUTOMATIC OPERATION PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
12 AUTOMATIC OPERATION
292
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 12. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
12.1 When the cycle start signal (ST) is turned to “1”, then turned to “0” when
automatic operation (MEM) is selected, the Power Mate enters automatic
CYCLE START operation state and operation starts. At the same time, the cycle start lamp
SIGNAL (INPUT) ST signal STL [12.3] turns to “1”. The cycle start signal (ST) is ignored
<G007#2> when:
(1) AUTO mode is not selected;
(2) Feed hold signal (*SP) is “0”;
(3) Emergency stop signal (*ESP) is “0”;
(4) External reset signal (ERS) is “1”;
(5) During sequence number search;
(6) Alarm state is displayed on CRT/MDI or DPL/MDI;
(7) NOT READY is displayed on CRT/MDI or DPL/MDI;
(8) STL signal is output during automatic operation starting; or
(9) Axis movement commanded by the previous command is not ended.
When the following occurs during automatic operation, the machine
stops and the STL signal turns to “0”:
(1) *SP signal is “0”;
(2) *ESP signal is “0”;
(3) ERS signal is “1”;
(4) RESET button is pushed;
(5) Commands of one block are ended in single block state;
(6) Manual data input command execution is ended;
(7) End of record code is read during automatic operation;
(8) Axis movement stops by an alarm; or
(9) Mode is switched to manual handle/step feed or jog feed.
Generally, the cycle start signal is input by pushbutton.
293
12. AUTOMATIC OPERATION PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
NOTE
If the sequence number search is performed through MDI
panel during automatic operation, the OP signal turns to “1”.
294
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 12. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
12.2 When the feed hold signal (*SP) is turned to “0” during automatic
operation or manual data input, the Power Mate enters the feed hold state
FEED HOLD SIGNAL and stops. At the same time, the cycle start lamp signal (STL[12.3]) turns
(INPUT) *SP to “0” and the feed hold lamp signal (SPL[12.4]) turns to “1”.
<G008#5> The CNC does not enter automatic operation again even if the *SP signal
is “1”. Operation can be restarted by turning the *SP signal to “1”
followed by turning the cycle start signal (ST[12.1]) to “1”, then turning
the ST signal to “0”.
ST ST ST
STL STL
SPL
*SP *SP
If the *SP signal is “0” during the execution of a block where only
M[15.1], function code is programmed, the STL signal turns to “0”
immediately, the SPL signal turns to “1” and the automatic operation is
stopped (feed hold state). When the FIN signal is returned, the
corresponding operation is executed. The Power Mate operates until the
execution of the block is completed, then the SPL signal turns to “0” (the
STL signal remains “0”) and the Power Mate switches to the feed hold
state (the same state as the stop state after the execution of one block in
the single block mode).
See Section 12.1 for an explanation of the feed hold state.
295
12. AUTOMATIC OPERATION PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
OP
STL
SPL
ST
*SP
MFIN
OP
STL
SPL
ST
*SP
Before the
completion of
movement
MFIN
296
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 12. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
OP
STL
SPL
ST
*SP
12.3 This signal indicates that the system is operating automatically. Refer to
Section 12.1, cycle start signal ST, for a detailed description.
CYCLE START LAMP
SIGNAL (OUTPUT)
STL <F000#5>
297
12. AUTOMATIC OPERATION PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
12.5 The following output signals indicate the status of the Power Mate:
AUTOMATIC (1) Cycle start lamp STL
OPERATION SIGNAL (2) Feed hold lamp SPL
(OUTPUT) OP (3) Automatic operation OP
<F000#7> The following table shows the relationship between the state of the Power
Mate and the signals.
12.6 When several part programs are stored in program storage memory
beforehand, a workpiece number can be searched with the workpiece
WORKPIECE number search signals PN0 to PN7 from the machine side.
NUMBER SEARCH First, a number from O001 to O255 is given to each part program as the
SIGNAL (INPUT) PN0 work piece number using address 0. Input the PN0 to PN7 signals from
the machine side in accordance with the table 12.6.
TO PN7 <G009>
Table 12.6
Workpiece No. PN7 PN6 PN5 PN4 PN3 PN2 PN1 PN0
Not searched
0001 Ę
0002 Ę
0003 Ę Ę
: : : : : : : : :
: : : : : : : : :
0254 Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę
0255 Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę
Ę : Contacts closed
: Contacts opened
When the cycle start signal ST[12.1] is input in the reset state, a program
with program number specified with PN0 to PN7 is searched and the
program is executed from the beginning.
Power Mate
PN0
PN1
PN2
L L
PN7
+24V
298
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 12. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
NOTE
1 This function can be used only at automatic operation.
2 Always select the program number from O001 to O255.
3 Program numbers from O001 to O255 can be used.
However, programs corresponding to all the program
numbers do not have to be stored in memory.
4 When a program corresponding to the set program number
is not stored in memory, an alarm (No. 59) is generated
when the start button is pressed.
5 Program search is performed only when the start button is
pressed in the reset state. When the control unit is in the
feed stop state (single block stop, etc.) or feed hold state,
program search is not performed even if the start button is
pressed and execution is started from the point specified by
the present execution pointer.
6 To restart program from halfway, press start button after
sequence number search in AUTO mode. The external
program number search is not performed and program
execution starts from the block which is searched by
sequence number search, because the OP signal outputs
by sequence number search in AUTO mode and the NC
reset state is released.
7 When the start button is pressed with all PN0 to PN7 open,
program search is not performed but execution is started
from the point specified by the present execution pointer.
To restart operation from a point within a program or from the
start of a program which cannot be searched by this
function, perform the usual sequence number search or
program number search operation (MDI panel operation),
the turn off (open) all the PN0 to PN7 and press the start
button.
299
12. AUTOMATIC OPERATION PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
12.7 When the machine lock signal MLK turns to “1”, operation is controlled
and the moving command does not output to the servo whatever in
MACHINE LOCK manual or automatic operation. The program continues to execute,
SIGNAL (INPUT) MLK performing all operations except the output of servo commands. The
<G044#1> modal G codes and the position display are updated. This function is used
to check the program, and is only performed for move commands. M
function is executed normally, and the FIN signal is sent to the CNC.
When the MLK signal turns to “1”, then “0”, during pulse distribution,
it is enabled immediately. The machine axes’ movement are accelerated
(“1”) and decelerated (“0”) by the signal changes.
When the MLK signal turns to “1” and automatic reference position return
(G28) is commanded, positioning command value is displayed on the
CRT but reference position return distance is not shown. (Fig. 12.7)
Command
speed
MLK MLK
“0” “1”
Machine
movement
Position
display
Fig.12.7
300
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 12. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
12.9 (Function)
This signal selects the dry run to set the feedrate of automatic
DRY RUN SIGNAL operation to the dry run speed set by a parameter (No.1410)
(INPUT) DRN instead of a command value .
<G046#7 > (Operation)
When this signal turns to “1”:
(1) In a dry run of automatic operation, rather than using a cutting
feedrate specified by a program, the CNC uses the value obtained by
applying the manual feedrate override to the dry speed set by
parameter No. 1410. The acceleration/deceleration time constant
remains that for the cutting feed. If rapid traverse selection signal
RT[7.3] remains “1”, the tool is fed at the maximum cutting feedrate.
(2) The rapid traverse in automatic operation is also set to the dry run
speed by parameter RDR (No.1401#6). If rapid traverse selection
signal RT is also “1”, the axis is fed at rapid traverse as before.
When RT is low, the time constant for manual continuous feed is
employed as the acceleration/deceleration time constant during the
dry run The time constant for rapid traverse is used when RT is high.
(3) If this signal changed during the travel, the axis decelerates to a stop
before accelerating to the specified feed rate.
12.10 (Function)
These signals override the cutting feedrate. Eight binary code
FEED RATE signals correspond to override values as follows:
OVERRIDE SIGNAL 7
(INPUT) *FV0 TO *FV7 Override value + ȍ | 2i Vi | %
<G012> i +0
Vi=0 when *FVi is “1” and Vi=1 when *FVi is “0”
These signals have the following weight.
*FV0 : 1%, *FV1 : 2%, *FV2 : 4%, *FV3 : 8%
*FV4 : 16%, *FV5 : 32%, *FV6 : 64%, *FV7 : 128 %
When all signals are “0”, they are regarded as overriding 0% in
the same way as when all signals are “1”.
Thus, the override is selectable in steps over a range of 0 to
254%.
(Operation)
Actual feedrate is obtained by multiplying the speed specified
in cutting feed in automatic operation mode by the override
value selected by this signal.
The override is regarded as 100%, regardless of this signal, in
the following cases:
D Override cancel signal OVC [12.1] is ”1”.
12.11 Feedrate override is fixed to 100% while this signal is “1” (See Sec.12.1).
This signal does not effect rapid traverse override. The feedrate override
OVERRIDE CANCEL is effective when this signal is “0”.
SIGNAL (INPUT) OVC
<G006#4>
301
12. AUTOMATIC OPERATION PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
12.12 This signal is effective during automatic operation. Setting the BDT1 -
9 to “1” ignores information read after the appropriate code is sent, until
OPTIONAL BLOCK the end of block code (EOB code). The code for each signal is shown
SKIP SIGNAL (INPUT) below, and Figs 12.12 (a) - (d) show examples
BDT (BDT1), Input signal Heading code ignored
BDT2-BDT9 BDT(BDT1) /a letter or /1 (Note)
<G044#0,G045> BDT2 /2
BDT3 /3
BDT4 /4
BDT5 /5
BDT6 /6
BDT7 /7
BDT8 /8
BDT9 /9
NOTE
BDT1 includes a conventional BDT function. Setting BDT1
to “1” ignores the block to be read when the slash code is
followed by a letter.
F;/ N 1 2 3 X 5 6 FFFF , N 7 8 ; FF
Ignored
NOTE
Setting the BDT1 - 9 to “1” when a block including a slash
code is already being read does not ignore that block,
because the BDT signal only becomes “1” after the slash
code is read.
FF ; / 3 N 1 2 3 X 5 6 FF ; N 7 8 FF ; / 3 N 9 0 1 Z 1 2F ;
BDT3 ON
302
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 12. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
NOTE
Setting the BDT1 - 9 to “1” when a block including a slash
code is already being read does not ignore that block,
because the BDT signal only becomes “1” after the slash
code is read.
FF ; / 2 N 1 2 3 X 5 6 FF ; N 7 8 FF ; / 2 N 9 0 1 Z 1 2 FF ;
OFF
BDT2 ON
NOTE
When a block includes more than one slash code, matching
even one corresponding BDT ignores the entire block.
FF ; /2 / 3 / 4 / 5 N 1 2 3 X 5 6 F F F ; / 2 N 1 2 4 X 3 6FF ;
ON
BDT3
Ignored Not ignored
303
12. AUTOMATIC OPERATION PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
12.13 When the MIn (n:1 to 6) signal turns to “1”, the algebraical sign of the axis
command value in MEM mode is inverted. This function is not available
MIRROR IMAGE in JOG mode or for the movement between intermediate position and
SIGNAL (INPUT) MIn reference position given by the G28 automatic reference position return.
<G106> The mirror image signal can be turned to “1” in the following cases:
(1) During offset cancel;
(2) When the CNC is in the automatic operation stop state and not in the
feed hold state (See Sec.12.1).
X
B
A
B’
Z
0
When MI1 signal turned to “1” at point A
304
13. SIGNALS IN CUTTING MODE
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE (OUTPUT) CUT <F002#6>
13 CUT <F002#6>
NOTE
If interlock *IT [8.1] or *RILK [8.1] is applied during
movement in cutting mode, the signal becomes 1.
305
14. SCREEN STATE SIGNALS (OUTPUT)
DPL0, DPL1, DPL2 <F254 #0 TO #2> PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
14 <F254 #0 TO #2>
The screen state signals make up a 3–bit code signal for indicating the
DPL/MDI screen state.
DPL2 DPL1 DPL0 Screen State
0 0 0 Position display
0 0 1 Program
0 1 0 Offset/Macro variables/Setting
0 1 1 Parameter/Diagnose
1 0 0 Alarm/Message
306
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 15. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION
15 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION
307
15. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
15.1
M FUNCTION
15.1.1
M Function at 1–path
Control Mode
NOTE
1 M codes are buffered, except for M00, M01, M02, and M30.
2 M98 and M99 (subprogram call and end) are not sent to the
machine side.
3 For M00, M01, M02 and M30 only, M code and MF signals
are sent; the control of these signals shall be designed on
the Poower Mate side.
4 When the automatic operation is stopped by M02 or M30,
it is necessary to send the external reset signal from the
machine side to the CNC, instead of the FIN signal, When
the external reset signal is returned against the M02 or M30,
the control returns to the top of the program recently
executed and enters the reset state. When the FIN signal
is returned, the control returns to the beginning of the
program recently executed and executes it from the top..
5 M800 to M899 are reserved by the simultaneous block start
function.
308
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 15. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION
The code signal, read signal, and finish signal timing is shown below:
M code signal
M00 to M31
MF
FIN
TMF
TFIN
DEN
TMF, TFIN are set by parameter.
TMF (no. 3010) : 16 to 256msec (8msec steps)
TFIN (no. 3011) : 16 to 256msec (8msec steps)
TMF TFIN
High–speed M/S/T The interface between PLC to Power Mate is controlled using this signal,
interface signal (input) allowing high-speed processing of M function.
MFIN <G005#0> When MF and MFIN ststes are opposed, the Power Mate assumes that an
M code is being issued, and waits until the signal states are identical (the
PLC switches MFIN). When the same state is reached, the M function is
completed and the Power Mate shifts to the next block.
When the status of bits indicating M function end MFINand the code
output end MF are different, the Power Mate is placed in the state in which
the M command is transmitted. The PLC then switches the end signal sfter
machine tool processing, so that the bit status indicates M function end,
and the Power Mate status indicates all M function processes are
complete.
For example, when a 2-block M command continues:
309
15. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
M command
M code
MF
MFIN
15.1.2
M Code in Multipath Miscellaneous function binary code signals (output)
Mode EM11 α to EM28 α <F132, F135, F138, F141, F230, F233>
Miscellaneous function strobe signals (output)
EMF α <F131#0, F134#0, F137#0, F140#0, F229#0, F232#0>
Miscellaneous function end signals (input)
EFIN α <G142#0, G154#0, G166#0, G178#0, G226#0, G238#0>
Miscellaneous function executing signals (output)
EDEN α <F130#3, F133#3, F136#3, F139#3, F228#3, F231#3>D
Group M code MF FIN DEN
NOTE
α indicates B, C, D, E or F.
310
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 15. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION
Explanations As the M function interface in the multipath mode, the PMC axis control
interface is used. This interface is provided for each axis, and areas for up
to six paths are available.
As the interface address of the M function used for each path, the interface
for the axis that appears first in the list of the axes belonging to a path
defined in the block (G130P ...) of a multipath command is used.
Example: First axis X
Second axis Y
Third axis Z
Fourth axis U
When the axes are set as above:
G130 P1 X1 Y1 ;
M10 ; ← The interface for the axis that appears first in the
list of the axes for path 1, namely, the X–axis (first
. axis), is used.
.
G130 P2 Z1 U1 ;
M20: ← The interface for the axis that appears first in the
list of the axes for path 2, namely, the Z–axis (third
axis), is used.
NOTE
The restrictions below are imposed on the M codes in the
multipath mode:
D The M code values ranging from 0 to 255 can be used.
D Specify only one M code in a block.
D The auxiliary function lock signal (AFL) is disabled.
D Control using system variable #3003 over waiting for the
auxiliary function complete signal is disabled.
D DM00, DM01, DM02, and DM30 are not output. When
M00, M01, M02, or M30 is specified, a code only is output
as with ordinary M codes.
D By setting both of bit 7 of parameter No. 8003 and bit 7
of parameter No. 3001 to 0, strobe and complete signal
transfer based on the M codes can be performed at high
speed.
311
15. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
15.2 When an M function is commanded in the MEM or MDI mode, and axial
movement ends but the FIN signal for the M command is not issued, the
DISTRIBUTION END distribution end signal DEN turns to “1”. The DEN turns to “1” until the
SIGNAL (OUTPUT) FIN signal for the M command is issued even in the block in which no
DEN <F001#3> axial movement exists. When the operation ends by arrival of the FIN
signal for the M function, the DEN signal turns to “0”. Use this signal
to discriminate between simultaneous execution of an auxiliary (M)
function with the start of movement, and execution after the end of
movement when an auxiliary function and move command are specified
in the same block.
Fig.15.2 shows the time chart of this signal.
Commad
MF
FIN
Feedrate
Axis
move
DEN
Not output because FIN
DEN is not output Output because FIN is not
already returned
yet returned at this point
312
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 15. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION
15.3 Power Mate sends M decode signals DM00, DM01, DM02, DM30 to
PMC in parallel with code signals M00, M01, M02, and M30.
M DECODE SIGNALS
The in-position condition applies to these decode signals; they are sent
(OUTPUT) DM00, after the positioning has been completed when the move command is
DM01, DM02, DM30 specified in the same block. They are not sent if the FIN signal returns
<F009#7, #6, #5, #4> before the positioning ends.
The signal output timing is the same as in the binary code signal of normal
M function.
For details, refer to section 15.1. Use DM02 or DM30 as a reset or reset
& rewind function. DM00 and DM01 are employable as the program stop
and optional stop, respectively.
The finish signal FIN of M00 and M01 shall turn to “1” when the operator
presses the cycle start button in this method.
X, Y X, Y
Output transistor
ON
ZPZ/EF
FIN
Machine side contact close
TFIN Machine side operation
15.4 If this signal is turned ”1”, binary code signals and M read command
signal is not output, even when executing M function block.
AUXILIARY
FUNCTION LOCK NOTE
SIGNAL (INPUT) AFL 1 Internal processing of M98 and M99 is done, regardless of
<G005#6> the AFL signal.
2 M00, M01, M02, and M03 are output even if the AFL signal
is “1”.
313
15. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
: either 0 or 1 is acceptable.
314
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 15. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION
Output signal
(WAT1 - WAT4)
Complete input
signal (WFN1 - WFN4) (NOTE 1)
NOTE
1 As shown in Table 2 when the waiting M code is specified,
the output signal (WAT1 - WAT4) is turned ”1” and when the
complete input signal condition is satisfied everything is
turned ”0”.
Note however that when the waiting M code is specified and
the corresponding complete input signal condition is
already satisfied, the access movement command is
executed without delay, just the same as if the waiting signal
M code command had not been issued. In this kind of case,
the output signal (WAT1 - WAT4) is never turned ”1”.
2 As shown in Fig.15.5 (a), when the waiting M code
specification is carried out by continuous block, if the
complete input signal of the previous block cannot be turned
”0” between TWB it is possible that the it will be taken as the
complete input signal of the waiting M code specified by the
next block and therefore a combination of appropriate M
codes should be selected.
3 Example of waiting M code continuous command
Fig.15.5 (b), (c) show examples of subsequent block axis
movement commands that are executed continuously and
the waiting condition when the waiting M code is specified
by continuous block.
315
15. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
Fig.15.5 (c) An Example of a Subsequent Block Axis Movement Command Not Being Continuously
Executed
(3) SIGNAL
(a) Address Map
PMC ³ CNC 1 DI signal
PMC
ADDRESS #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2 DO signal
PMC
ADDRESS #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
316
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 15. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION
Instruction format
Example 2 When simultaneous block start is performed for units #0, #1, and #2
Specify M826 for #0.
Specify M825 for #1.
Specify M823 for #2.
Program example (simultaneous block start of units #0 and #1)
Program for unit #0 Program for unit #1
· · ·
· ·
· ·
M824 ·
G01 X __ Y__ F__ ; M821
· G01 A__ B__ F__ ;
· ·
· ·
·
M82X codes cause units to wait for each other before starting operation.
Blocks and will start simultaneously with the interpolation level.
In other words, if a feedrate F is set accurately, operation will be the same
as with simultaneous 4-axis interpolation. However, in this case, the
servo gain and time constants need to be the same.
317
15. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
NOTE
The axes used for simultaneous block start are fixed. They
are determined by the way cables are connected and by
specifications within the program. The axes used cannot be
changed partway through the program.
Examples When simultaneous block start is performed for the first and second units,
it cannot later be performed for the first and third units.
#0 #1 #2
· · ·
· · ·
· · ·
· · ·
M824 X30. Y20. · ·
· M821 A40. B15. ·
· · M822 Z50.
· · ·
M822 X50 · ·
· · ·
·
CRT/MDI unit
#0 #1 #2 #3
(2) Groups
With one CRT link, simultaneous block start can be performed for up
to four Power Mates. For five or more Power Mates, contact FANUC.
318
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 15. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION
CRT #0 #1 #2 #3
Last of
CRT/MDI
Power Mate
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SYNC 1 : Synchronize interpolation reference signals.
(Set to 1 when performing simultaneous block start.)
0 : Do not synchronize interpolation reference signals.
MATR 1 : Make this the master unit during synchronization of
interpolation reference signals.
0 : Make this the slave unit during synchronization of
interpolation reference signals.
When simultaneous block start is performed, one unit in a link
is the master unit and the rest are slave units. Power Mate
whose unit number is #0 is made the master unit.
NOTE
The system will not startup if there is no master or there is
more than one.
319
16. PMC KEY DATA REFERENCE
FUNCTION (OUTPUT) PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
320
16. PMC KEY DATA REFERENCE
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE FUNCTION (OUTPUT)
NOTE
When three keys or more are pushed at the same time, the
key data cannot be connectly read.
Signal name Key Signal name Key Signal name Key Signal name Key
K0 . . . . . . KPRD . . KPOS . . KN . . . . .
<F210#0> <F211#3> <F213#0> <F217#1>
0 . POS N
K5 . . . . . . KALT . . . KDWN . . KM . . . . .
<F210#5> <F212#0> <F214#0> <F218#4>
5 ALTER ± M
K6 . . . . . . KINS . . . KUP . . . . KS . . . . .
<F210#6> <F212#1> <F214#1> <F218#5>
6 INSRT ° S
K7 . . . . . . KDLT . . . KP . . . . . P KT . . . . .
<F210#7> <F212#2> <F214#4> I <F218#6>
7 DELET T
K8 . . . . . . KINP . . . KQ . . . . . Q KSHRP .
<F211#0> <F212#3> <F214#5> J <F218#7>
8 INPUT #
K9 . . . . . . KWRT . . KH . . . . .
<F211#1> <F212#4> <F214#6>
9 WRITE H
KMNS . . KRED . . KO . . . . .
<F211#2> <F212#6> <F217#0>
–/+ READ O
321
17. SOFTWARE LIMIT EXTERNAL
SETTING (INPUT) +LMn <G110>,
–LMn <G112> RLSOT<G007#7> PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
If the tool end is aligned with the end of limit area while replacing the tool,
pressing the setting button will rewrite parameter Nos. 1320 and 1321 and
supply the machine’s current position (coordinates) as the software limit.
These signals are prepared for each axis and direction. The limit release
signal, which is common to all axes, cancels the original software limit
and institutes a new limit.
+LMn . . . . . : Soft limit setting signal to + direction of all axes
(n : 1 to 6)
–LMn . . . . . . : Soft limit setting signal to – direction of all axes
(n : 1 to 6)
RLSOT : Soft limit release signal
322
18. SKIP SIGNALS (INPUT) SKIP,
SKP2, SKP3, SKIP4<X000#7, #0, #1, #2>
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE <x1000#7, #0, #1, #2>SKIPP <G212#7>
18 <X000#7, #0, #1, #2> <X1000#7, #0, #1, #2> SKIPP <G212#7>
If the skip signal SKIP is input from the machine side during move
command execution in G31 or if a skip signal (SKIP, SKIP2, SKIP3,
SKIP4) which is effective for the number commanded by P is input from
the machine side during the execution of a block for which address P has
been commanded subsequently to G31, the coordinate values at the
moment of startup of that signal are stored in custom macro variables, the
block being executed ends at that moment and the next block is proceeded
to.
The coordinate values stored in the Power Mate are used as called by the
custom macro instruction. This function is used in the following cases.
(1) The moment of machining end is given by a signal from the machine
side instead of being programmed like in grinding.
(2) The work dimension is calculated by the custom macro instruction by
moving the machine in the G31 mode, measuring the coordinate
values at that moment by the signal from the detection sensor and
storing them in the Power Mate in order to measure the dimension of
a work, etc. configuration.
Skip signals SKIP, SKIP2, SKIP3 and SKIP4 assume the skip state at
contact close. Skip signal SKIPP is the signal to skip in ladder program.
+24V
SKIP
SKIP
Skip signal
SKIP2
Power Mate Skip signal 2
SKIP3
Skip signal 3
SKIP4
Skip signal 4
323
18. SKIP SIGNALS (INPUT) SKIP,
SKP2, SKP3, SKIP4<X000#7, #0, #1, #2>
<x1000#7, #0, #1, #2>SKIPP <G212#7> PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
NOTE
1 The G31 block unconditionally assumes the G01 mode.
The feed rate becomes the value specified by the F code.
2 If measuring using signal SKIP, SKIP2, SKIP3 and SKIP4,
the feed rate must be programmed to be constant.
Measuring errors become lange if the feed rate is different.
The measuring error when the feed rate is constant is
shown below.
ERRmax + Fm 1 4
60 1000
324
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 19. MECHANICAL HANDLE FEED
325
19. MECHANICAL HANDLE FEED PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
19.1 These signals prevent the servo motors from overload when the axes are
clamped under certain conditions.
SERVO OFF SIGNAL
When one of these signals turns to “1”, the servo motor is turned off. The
(INPUT) SVFn <G126> mechanical clamp is done by using the auxiliary function. Set the timing
for the auxiliary function, mechanical clamp and servo off signals as
shown in the diagram below. The clamp command auxiliary function
should be executed only after the distribution end signal (DEN[15.2]) has
been sent.
Machine
clamp
Servo off state
SVF1,…
MFIN
19.2 When the signals SVFn [19.1] is turned to “1”, the servo is turned off.
Since the positioning control does not function under this condition, an
FOLLOW-UP SIGNAL error is produced if the machine tool moves. To compensate for the
(INPUT) *FLWU erroneous movement, there are two remedies, depending upon the status
<G007#5> of the *FLWU signal.
(1) When *FLWU is “1”, the servo error amount is recorded on the error
counter. When the servo off signal is reset, the machine tool will
move to cancel the error.
(2) When *FLWU is “0”, the follow-up function is engaged. The present
position of the Power Mate is changed to reset the error counter to
zero. The machine tool remains in a deviated position.
Follow-up functions must be used during emergency stop or a servo
alarm.
19.3 This outputs to PMC whether or not the checked amount of servo position
deviation exceeds the value set to parameter.
SERVO POSITION
[Signal] SVERn (n : 1 to 6)
DEVIATION MONITOR
[Function] Servo position deviation monitor signal
SIGNAL (OUTPUT) 1 : The amount of servo position deviation exceeds the
SVERn, <F220#3 TO checked value.
F225#3> 0 : The amount of servo position deviation does not exceed
the checked value.
Combine with the torque limit [26] and come by the
specification.
326
20. I/O DEVICE EXTERNAL
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE CONTROL FUNCTION
(1) General
The part program, parameter, variable, diagnose data
registering/outputting operation by the I/O device is possible using
external signals. This operation is processed in the background.
Machine
Power Servo motor
Mate
Foreground execution
EXRD RPBSY
EXWT RPALM
EXSTP BGEACT External input/output
machine
Background execution
(2) SPECIFICATIONS
(a) External Read Start Signal (input) EXRD <G058#1>
D This signal begins an operation whereby part programs are read
from input machines and stored on tape memories.
D If this signal is turned ON the Power Mate operates in the
following way.
1 It reads and loads part programs from input machines as a
background editing operation.
2 A choice can be made by parameter whether all input
program are loaded at once or just a single program.
(Parameter No.3201#1)
It is possible to specify by parameter whether unprotected
programs should be deleted before loading begins.
(Parameter No.3201#0)
3 The RPBSY signal switches ON while loading and
read/punch is in operation.
4 Operation is brought to a halt if there is a reset (ERS
<G008#7>) while the program is being read, or if the external
read/punch stop signal EXSTP is switched ON.
5 When the read/punch interface is already being used in the
foreground, the external read start signal EXRD is ignored.
(While being input into tape etc.)
327
20. I/O DEVICE EXTERNAL
CONTROL FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
328
20. I/O DEVICE EXTERNAL
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE CONTROL FUNCTION
NOTE
Program input or output operation can be automatically
selected by executing EXRD or EXWT without selecting
EPRG, EVAR, EPARM, and EDGN.
NOTE
Macro variable data can be entered by background
processing using an external I/O device only in the data
output format specified with bit 2 (VFP) of parameter No.
6001 set to 1.
329
20. I/O DEVICE EXTERNAL
CONTROL FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
D Outputting operation
1 A specified number of data items are output to the I/O device,
starting with a specified number, in the order #100 to #199 and
#500 to #699.
Specify a macro variable output start number in EDG0 to EDG15,
and specify the number of output data items in EDN0 to END15.
Data output is not started if the start number specified in EDG0 to
EDG15 is out of the ranges 100 to 199 and 500 to 699, or the
number of data items specified in EDN0 to EDN15 is 0. If a set
value is out of a specifiable range, data output is stopped.
(i) Parameter selection signal (input), EPARM <G251#6>
D Function: Selects parameters as I/O data.
D Inputting operation
1 Parameters are input from the I/O device.
Input condition: Set the setting parameter (PWE) to 1.
D Outputting operation
1 All parameters are output.
Parameter data
N parameter number A1 P data A2 P data ;
where
N : A value that follows N is a parameter No.
A : A value that follows A is an axis number (for axis
type parameter only).
A1 = first axis; A2 = second axis;
P : A number that follows P is data.
Example)
%;
N1020 A1 P88 A2 P89;
...
%
(j) Diagnose selection signal (input), EDGN <G251#7>
D Function: Selects diagnostic data as I/O data.
D Inputting operation
1 Diagnostic data is input from the I/O device.
NOTE
Diagnostic data can be loaded into the PMC nonvolatile
memory and internal memory areas, D0000 to D1859 and
R0000 to R0999 only.
D Outputting operation
1 A specified number of data items are output in ascending order of
data numbers to the I/O device, starting with a specified number.
Specify a diagnostic data output start number in EDG0 to EDG15,
and specify the number of output data items in EDN0 to END15.
Data output is not started if the start number specified in EDG0 to
EDG15 is out of the range of data numbers, or the number of data
items specified in EDN0 to EDN15 is 0. If a set value is out of the
specifiable range, data output is stopped.
N data number P data ;
where
N : A value that follows N is a sum of an address
number and a value determined for each address.
The data number can range from N20000 to
N49999.
330
20. I/O DEVICE EXTERNAL
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE CONTROL FUNCTION
NOTE
When diagnostic data is output, character data is not output
directly as ISO/EIA tape codes.
331
20. I/O DEVICE EXTERNAL
CONTROL FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
EXRD
EXSTP
PRBSY
BGEACT
Read start Read end Read start Read interruption Read start
EXWT
EXSTP
PRBSY
BGEACT
Punch start Punch end Punch start Punch interruption Punch start
EXRD or EXWT
RPALM
PRBSY
BGEACT
Read/punch start Read/punch interruption Read/punch start
332
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 21. EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT
Power Mate
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
JA12 (3, 4) JA12 (5 to 8)
333
21. EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
334
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 21. EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT
HA
ÃÃ
T 14
ÃÃ T
HB
T 14 T 14
+direction pulse
–direction pulse
T>330 µsec
Inversion of direction
+direction –direction
movement command pulse movement command pulse
External input pulse
HA
HB
+pulse
Count of
pulse in
Power Mate
–pulse
335
21. EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
PA PA
*PA *PA
PB PB
*PB *PB
TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP
TCYC TCYC
+direction –direction
External input pulse movement command pulse movement command pulse
PA
PB
+ pulse
Count of
pulse in
Power Mate –pulse
336
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 21. EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT
(g) External pulse input axis selection signal (input) HS1A, HS1B,
HS1C <G018#0, #1, #2>
Axes are selected according to the setting of the HS1A, HS1B, and
HS1C, as listed below.
HS1C HS1B HS1A Moved axis
0 0 0 None
0 0 1 First axis
0 1 0 Second axis
0 1 1 Third axis
1 0 0 Fourth axis
1 0 1 Fifth axis
1 1 0 Sixth axis
Setting all of HS1A, HS1B, and HS1C to ”0” means that the external
pulse input function is not to be used.
(h) Incremental feed signal (input) MP1, MP2 <G019#4, #5>
The MP1 and MP2 signals enable the input pulse to be increased by
the magnifications listed below.
MP2 MP1 Magnification
0 0 1
0 1 10
1 0 M
1 1 N
NOTE
The MP1 and MP2 signals are also used to switch the
amount of movement per incremental feed step. (See
Chapter 9.)
(i) Parameter
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7100 HPF
337
21. EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7670 EXH
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when EPCON = 1.
(When EPCON = 0, DI signal setting only is enabled.)
338
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 21. EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7701 SMP16 SMP2 SMP1
339
22. FANUC I/O LINK FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
(1) OUTLINE
The I/O Link is serial interface that transfers high speed I/O signals
(bit data) between CNC and cell controllers and I/O Unit-A, Power
Mate.
When an I/O card, or an I/O unit is to be used with Power Mate, I/O
allocation is required at the time of ladder creation.
(2) MAKE UP
Slave
Group
Power Mate #0
Power Group
Mate #1
Group
I/O card #3
Group
#15
(a) FANUC I/O Link is made up of 1 master and many slave units.
(b) A maximum of 16 groups of slaves can be connected to 1 I/O link.
The number of slave connections per 1 group are as follows.
I/O Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum 2 units (2 base)
Power Mate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 unit
I/O card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 unit
(c) Any slave can be connected to any group. Note however, that it
is not possible to mix different kinds of slave in 1 group.
340
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 22. FANUC I/O LINK FUNCTION
Master Slave #0
Output
1024 Input
output
points
Slave #1
Output
Input
1024
input
points
Each slave has a fixed number of I/O points and the maximum number of
slaves possible on 1 I/O Link is:
Input points: 1024, Output points: 1024.
The number of I/O points possessed and the actual number of I/O
points may differ.
341
22. FANUC I/O LINK FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
(4) CONNECTIONS
Slave
Master I/O Unit–A I/O Unit–A
10m 2m
CNC Group
F-D Mate #0
Power Mate
10m
Power Group
Mate #1
2m
Optical adapter
Optical adapter
2m
Group
Power
#2
Mate
10m
Group
I/O card #3
Group
#15
(a) The maximum cable length between each unit and equipment is
10 m. Note however that the maximum length within any unified
group of I/O units is 2 m.
(b) A maximum length of 200 m is possible if an optical adapter is
used. Note however that an optical adapter cannot be used
between I/O units in the same group.
I/O card
Power Mate
I/O unit
342
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 22. FANUC I/O LINK FUNCTION
When an I/O card, or an I/O unit is used with Power Mate, the
Power Mate functions as a master unit, and the I/O card, or the
I/O unit functions as a slave unit.
(5) SPECIFICATIONS LIST
Item Specifications Remarks
Equipment and Master: Power Mate-D/H
units that can be
connected Slave: I/O Unit-A
I/O Card
Power Mate-D/E/F/H
Number of Master: 1 unit The number of
connections slave connections
Slave: maximum of 16 groups is limited by I/O
I/O Unit–A: 2 units/group points.
Others : 1 unit/group
Number of Master: maximum I/O = 1024/1024 Refer to “(3) I/O
operating I/O Data operation”
points Slaves: per group
maximum I/O = 256/256
Cable length Between each equipment and unit:
maximum 10m
Note however that between any
unified group of I/O units:
maximum 2m
(6) SETTING
The slave type of the I/O Link is set by the master unit.
Setting for when the Power Mate is used as a slave is shown below.
(a) Setting the module name
Setting when the Power Mate is used as a slave
FS04A : When DI/DO = 32/32
FS08A : When DI/DO = 64/64
OC02I : When DI = 128
OC02O : When DO = 128
OC03I : When DI = 256
OC03O : When DO = 256
Setting when I/O card D (48/32) is used as a slave
DI side : /6 DI = 64 points is assumed.
DO side : /4 DO = 32 points
Setting when I/O card E (96/64) is used as a slave
DI side : CN01I DI = 128 points is assumed.
DO side : CN01O DO = 64 points
No setting is required when a built-in I/O card is used. (Buit–in
I/O card is not a I/O Link.)
(b) Setting the base slot
The settings below are common to the Power Mate, I/O card.
Base : 0
Slot : 1
The above items are set on the master unit.
(7) I/O Link master area
Among X000 to X127 and Y000 to Y127, up to 1024 input points and
up to 1024 output points can be used.
343
22. FANUC I/O LINK FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
is only enabled when the number of FANUC I/O Link signal points
used is 64/64.
NOTE
The address on the host side of DI/DO is decided by the
PMC address assignment.
344
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 22. FANUC I/O LINK FUNCTION
(9) Data I/O function using the FANUC I/O Link (input)
IOLNK<G251#0>
Part programs, parameters, macro variables, and PMC data can be
transferred via the FANUC I/O Link linking a master unit to the
Power Mate.
IOLNK<G251#0> is a signal for selecting either RS–232C or
FANUC I/O Link connection when part programs, parameters, macro
variables, and PMC data are transferred.
IOLNK set to 0: Uses RS–232C.
IOLNK set to 1: Uses the FANUC I/O Link.
1) The data I/O control method depends entirely on the function of
the FANUC I/O Link master. This function cannot be used when
a FANUC I/O Link master that does not support this function is
used. The Power Mate–D/E/F/H cannot act as a master with this
function.
2) This function can transfer all data that can be transferred via the
RS–232C interface.
3) For data output, ISO code or EIA code format is selected using
setting parameter ISO.
Setting parameter ISO set to 1: Outputs ISO code.
Setting parameter ISO set to 0: Outputs EIA code.
4) For data input, the ISO or EIA code is identified automatically.
5) The I/O data format of the RS–232C interface is used.
6) The I/O condition of the RS–232C interface is used. However,
the user need not set a baud rate or stop bit.
345
23. CUSTOM MACRO PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
23
346
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 23. CUSTOM MACRO
23.1 Custom macro signals are interface signals used for custom macro and
PMC programs. Input/output is controlled by system variables from the
CUSTOM MACRO custom macro side, by specifying both addresses and bits from the PMC
SIGNAL (just as for DI/DO signals).
(INPUT) UI0 TO UI15
<G054, G055>,
(OUTPUT) UO0 TO
UO131 <F054 TO
F059>
The relationship among system variables, I/O signals, addresses, and bits
is shown in Tables 23.1 (a) and (b).
Table 23.1 (a) Custom Macro Input Signals Table 23.1 (b) Custom Macro Output Signals
System Interface input PMC address System Interface output PMC address
variable signal (bit) variable signal (bit)
#1000 UI0 G054 (0) #1100 UO0 F054(0)
#1001 UI1 G054 (1) #1101 UO1 F054 (1)
#1002 UI2 G054 (2) #1102 UO2 F054 (2)
#1003 UI3 G054 (3) #1103 UO3 F054 (3)
#1004 UI4 G054 (4) #1104 UO4 F054 (4)
#1005 UI5 G054 (5) #1105 UO5 F054 (5)
#1006 UI6 G054 (6) #1106 UO6 F054 (6)
#1007 UI7 G054 (7) #1107 UO7 F054 (7)
#1008 UI8 G055 (0) #1108 UO8 F055 (0)
#1009 UI9 G055 (1) #1109 UO9 F055 (1)
#1010 UI10 G055 (2) #1110 UO10 F055 (2)
#1011 UI11 G055 (3) #1111 UO11 F055 (3)
#1012 UI12 G055 (4) #1112 UO12 F055 (4)
#1013 UI13 G055 (5) #1113 UO13 F055 (5)
#1014 UI14 G055 (6) #1114 UO14 F055 (6)
#1015 UI15 G055 (7) #1115 UO15 F055 (7)
#1133 UO100 to UO131 F056 to F059
347
23. CUSTOM MACRO PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
23.2 This signal calls and executes a program in memory. While a program
called by this signal is being executed, the program that was previously
INTERRUPT SIGNAL being executed as part of automatic operation is tentatively stopped.
FOR CUSTOM This signal can be received only during automatic operation (See
MACROS (INPUT) Sec.12.1).
UINT <G053#3> For details, see Operator’s Manual (B–62684EN).
348
24. TEMPORARY INTERRUPT DETECTION
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE SIGNAL ACT <G213#7>
24 <G213#7>
349
25. AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
(1) Outline
This function uses commands from the PMC to provide axis control
independent of the Power Mate.
It is possible to select any axis available for control and direct it by
using one of six DI/DO command groups. The axis parameters EDIO
(No. 8010) is used to define which of the six groups will be applied
to a given axis. It is possible to synchronize axis movement by
applying the same group of commands to two axes at the same time.
The axis controlled in this manner moves independently of any other
axis controlled by the Power Mate or PMC.
(2) Controlled axis
nth axis (n : 1 to 6) can be selected and controlled.
(3) Notes
(a) The controlled axis is not affected by the mode selection.
(b) Parameter OVE No. 8001#2 selects the use of either the same
signal as the Power Mate or a PMC axis control signal idependent
of the Power Mate for control of rapid traverse override, cutting
feed override, and dry run functions.
(c) While the feed hold, single block, reset, and interlock functions
of the Power Mate axes are invalid for the PMC-controlled axis,
the same control is possible by operating the PMC signal.
(d) Machine lock and emergency stop are effective under axes of
Power Mate control. The machine lock can be invalidated using
parameter MLE No. 8001#0.
(e) Control of a specific axis can be switched back and forth between
the Power Mate and PMC. When control is currently being
exercised by the PMC, parameter PCF No. 3105#1 selects
whether or not the actual speed display adds the axis movement
during that control.
(4) The commands
The following table shows the range of operations which can be performed
using the PMC control command signals EC0α to EC6α (α : A, B, C, D,
E, F) <G143#0-#6> <G155#0 to #6>, <G167#0 to #6>, <G179#0 to #6>,
<G227#0 to #6>, <G239#0 to #6>.
350
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 25. AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC
Equivalent
Axis control
Power Mate
command Operation
axes
signal
command
Rapid traverse–linear acceleration/
00H G00
deceleration
Cutting feed (feed/min.)–exponential
01H G91 G01
acceleration/deceleration
04H Dwell G04
Reference position return ; used after rapid Manual
traverse in the reference position return reference
05H
direction by means of parameter ZMIx no. position
1006#5 return
Continuous feed–exponential acceleration/ Controls a
06H deceleration. Causes continuous movement in spindle or
a specified direction along the controlled axis. rotary motion
Miscellaneous function ; Same operation as the
12H M function
miscellaneous function of Power Mate
NOTE
Where synchronous operation of two axes is being carried
out by use of the same command set, the same conditions
should be set in the feedrate parameters for each axis (rapid
traverse rate, acceleration/deceleration time constant,
linear axis/rotary axis, etc.)
351
25. AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
Axis control
Operation command Command data
signal
Rapid traverse 00H Total travel amount : EID0α–EID31α <G146 to G149> <G158 to G161>
<G170 to G173> <G182 to G185>
<G230 to G233> <G242 to G245>
In cases where parameter RPD No. 8002#0 is used to specify a rapid traverse rate
independent of the CNC, the following command data must be set :
Feedrate : EIF0α–EIF15α <G144 to G145> <G156 to G157>
<G168 to G169> <G180 to G181>
<G228 to G229> <G240 to G241>
Cutting feed 01H Total travel amount : EID0α–EID31α <G146 to G149> <G158 to G161>
(feed/min) <G170 to G173> <G182 to G185>
<G230 to G233> <G242 to G245>
Feedrate : EIF0α–EIF15α <G144 to G145> <G156 to G157>
<G168 to G169> <G180 to G181>
<G228 to G229> <G240 to G241>
Dwell 04H Dwell time : EID0α–EID31α <G146 to G149> <G158 to G161>
<G170 to G173> <G182 to G185>
<G230 to G233> <G242 to G245>
Reference 05H
position return
Continuous feed 06H Feed direction : EID31α <G149#7> <G161#7> <G173#7>
<G185#7> <G233#7> <G245#7>
Feedrate : EIF0α–EIF15α <G144 to G145> <G156 to G157>
<G168 to G169> <G180 to G181>
<G228 to G229> <G240 to G241>
Miscellaneous 12H Miscellaneous EID0α–EID7α <G146> <G158> <G170>
function function code <G182> <G230> <G242>
α : A, B, C, D, E, F
(b) Commanding two or more operations continuously
Using the PMC axis control function, the command blocks of two
or more operations are buffred by the Power Mate so that
commands are made continuously by PMC.
Even if one command is being executed, the Power Mate accepts
the next command as long as there is a vacancy in its buffer.
X X
352
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 25. AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC
353
25. AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
Command disabled
Execution
wait buffer 1
Execution
wait buffer 2
(1) (2)
Execution buffer
(6) Feedrate
(a) Maximum rapid traverse
(i) Linear axis
Metric output Inch output
Standard Standard
100000 mm/min 4000 inch/min
354
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 25. AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC
Increment system
Standard
1 to 100000 deg/min
355
25. AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
356
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 25. AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC
ESBK
8msec
[1] [2] or more
[3] [4]
Command data
(Input)
EBUF
(Input)
EBSY
(Output)
Execution wait
buffer 1
Execution wait
buffer 2
[1]
Execution
buffer °
Start
NOTE
1 The feedrate setting can be increased by a factor of 10
using parameter F10 (No. 8002#3).
2 When the feedrate is set to ”0”, the command will remain
buffered and the required operation will not be executed.
The ECLR reset signal must be used to release this
condition.
3 The feedrate is never clamped.
357
25. AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
(i) Axis travel amount, dwell time and auxiliary function codes
EID0α to EID31α.
(i) For rapid traverse and cutting feed,this signal uses binary
code to set the distance to be travelled by the spindle from its
current axis position (incremental value).
Linear axis (Maximum metric input setting)
Metric output Output in inches
Standard Standard
99999.999 mm 99999.999 mm
Rotation axis
Unit
IS-B
99999.999 deg
(ii) For dwell, this signal uses binary code to set the dwell time.
Setting value 1 to 9999999 msec
(iii) For jog feed, signal EID31 is used to set the jog feed
direction.
0 : Positive feed direction
1 : Negative feed direction
NOTE
EID0n to EID30n are undefined.
358
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 25. AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC
NOTE
1 In the above ”reset Power Mate”, the reset signal ECLRn is
not available. The reset button, the external reset signal
ERS <G008#7> or the emergency stop signal *ESP
<G008#4> should be used.
2 For the details of P/S alarm Nos.130 and 139, see item (11).
Miscellaneous
function command
Next command
Miscellaneous function
code output
TMF
EMF
TFIN
EFIN
EDEN
TFIN and TMF are set by parameter Nos. 3011 and 3010
(o) Overtravel in negative direction signal EOTNα
overtravel in positive direction signal EOTPα
When an overtravel alarm is detected, and the tool has exceeded
the stroke limit on the negative side, signal EOTNn turns to ”1”.
When the stroke limit has been exceeded on the positive side,
signal EOTPn turns to ”1”. The alarm signal EIALn turns to ”1”,
informing the PMC of the overtravel.
(For details, see item (1).)
359
25. AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
NOTE
Fo indicates the lowest feedrate set in parameter no.1421.
(u) Dry run signal DRNE; manual rapid traverse signal RTE
Dry run and manual rapid traverse can be performed
independently of the Power Mate by using parameter OVE No.
8001#2.
360
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 25. AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC
Rapid
p traverse Command from the PMC
button During rapid traverse During cutting feed
On Rapid traverse Maximum jog feed rate
Off Jog feed rate (Note) Jog feed rate
NOTE
Rapid traverse can be performed using parameter RDE No.
8001#3.
When the DRNE signal is ”1”, the specified rapid traverse and
cutting feed rates are ignored and the dry run speed set by
parameter No.1410 is used. Parameter RDE No. 8001#3
specifies if dry run is enabled or disabled for rapid traverse.
If RTE turns to ”1” during dry run, the workpiece is fed at the
rapid traverse rate (for rapid traverse) or at the maximum jog feed
rate (for cutting feed). If the RTE turns to ”0”, the workpiece is
fed at the jog feed rate.
(v) Override 0% signal EOV0
This signal turns to ”1” when the override amount is 0%.
(10)Parameters
The PMC and axis control of Power Mate functions use the same
parameters.
Bit. No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3105 PCF
PCF 1 : Movement along the PMC control axis is not added to the
actual speed display.
0 : Movement along the PMC control axis is added to the
actual speed display.
NOTE
This parameter is effective when control of the same axis is
switched between CNC and PMC.
Bit. No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8001 RDE OVE MLE
MLE 1 : The machine lock (MLK) signal is invalid for the PMC
control axis.
0 : The machine lock (MLK) signal is valid for the PMC
control axis.
OVE 1 : The PMC uses signals specific to PMC axis control for dry
run, override, and other functions.
0 : CNC signals for axis control are used by the PMC.
RDE 1 : Dry run is valid for the rapid traverse command during
PMC axis control.
0 : Dry run is invalid for the rapid traverse command during
PMC axis control.
361
25. AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
Bit. No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8002 F10 RPD
Bit. No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8005 NODIC
Bit. No.
8010 EDIO
362
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 26. TORQUE LIMIT FUNCTION
363
26. TORQUE LIMIT FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
n : 1 to 6
(2) Position and alarm check when a torque limit is applied
An excessive position check error and stop/move error can be ignored
by setting parameter No. 1803 only when a torque limit is applied.
Number
1803 TAL TIP
364
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 26. TORQUE LIMIT FUNCTION
365
26. TORQUE LIMIT FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
NOTE
The torque control function based on DI signal input is
disabled when the torque control function based on
parameter input is enabled or the torque limit enable signal
is turned off.
Table 26.4 (a) Torque Limit Value and Signals TRQn0 to TRQn7
Input
p value by
y TRQn0 to TRQn7 signal
TRQn
Q 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0
1 Ę
2 Ę
· · · · · · · · ·
· · · · · · · · ·
254 Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę
255 Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę
Ę : Contact : Contact open
Table 26.4 (b) Torque Limit Enable Signal and Torque Limit
Signals
366
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 26. TORQUE LIMIT FUNCTION
367
27. SPEED CONTROL SERVO ALARM
IGNORE SIGNAL (INPUT)
IGNVRY <G066#0> PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
If the speed control servo alarm is issued and this signal is high, the
control unit ignores the alarm, thus preventing the alarm state from being
set.
While this signal is “1”, the control unit ignores the speed control servo
alarm (alarm 401: VRDY OFF); consequently, the alarm state is not set.
The alarm state is set if an alarm other than the speed control servo alarm
is issued, however. If IGNVRY makes a “0” to “1” transition after the
speed control servo alarm has been issued, the alarm state is not canceled.
Only the speed control servo alarm issued while this signal is “1” is
ignored.
Application: Suppose an application exists which has a safety provision
to switch off the magnetic contactor (MCC) of the servo unit
when the limit switch on at the door of the splash guard is
activated when the splash guard is opened. This signal can
be used in such an application. When the MCC of the servo
unit is switched off, the speed control servo alarm is issued.
By making the IGNVRY signal “1” beforehand, however,
the alarm can be ignored.
When making IGNVRY “1”, be sure to make the feed hold
signal *SP [12.2] “0” at the same time to prevent automatic
operation from being activated.
IGNVRY
*SP
The MCC of
the servo unit
ON OFF
ON/OFF
t t
368
27. SPEED CONTROL SERVO ALARM
IGNORE SIGNAL (INPUT)
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE IGNVRY <G066#0>
NOTE
1 While the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal is set to 1, and a
servo alarm other than alarm No. 401 occurs, the control
unit detects the alarm.
2 When the control enters NOT READY status due to
emergency stop or a servo alarm and then the control is
reset, reset processing is not terminated until the VRDY
OFF alarm ignore signal is set to 0.
3 When the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal is set to 1 and the
servo amplifier ready signal is set to off, the motor is freed
from the drive, but follow up is not performed. To perform
follow up, set the servo off signal to 1.
369
28. CONTROLLED AXES DETACH PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
370
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 28. CONTROLLED AXES DETACH
28.1 (Function)
CONTROLLED AXIS These signals detach the control axes from control.
DETACH SIGNALS These signals are provided for each control axis; the affixed
number of the signal name shows the control axis number.
DTCHn<G124#0 TO
DTCHn The n–th axis is detached. (n : 1 to 6)
#5> (Operation)
When one of these signals is turned to “1”, the corresponding
axis is detached from control and the following conditions
apply:
1 Position control is not done.
2 Servo alarms related to this axis are ignored.
3 The interlock signal for the axis has automatically turned
to “0”.
4 Commands to the axis are accepted (in both automatic
and manual modes), but they are not executed, since the
interlock signal is “0”. Automatic operation cannot
proceed; it remains stopped in the block.
5 The axis continues to be shown on the CRT position
display.
6 The motor can be replaced with one of the same model.
7 No absolute pulse coder is used.
8 A servo amplifier is required for each axis to be detached.
This is because the power to the servo amplifier needs to
be turned off at the time of motor replacement.
These signals can be changed from “0” to “1” or from “1” to “0”
regardless of whether power has been turned on. They should
never be turned on or off during axis movement.
(Use) When attachments are used (such as a detachable rotary table),
these signals are selected according to whether the attachments
are mounted.
NOTE
1 For these signals to be attached, parameter No. 1005#7
must be set, indicating the axes are detachable.
2 Setting parameter No. 0012#7 from the MDI panel detaches
the axes in the same way as these signals.
28.2 These signals indicate that the control axes are detached from the control.
When the control n–th axis is attached, the signals are “0”; when n–th axis
CONTROLLED AXIS is detached, the signals are “1”.
DETACH STATUS
SIGNALS MDTCHn
<F110#0 TO #5>
371
<X000#0, X1000#0>, EXF2 <X000#1,
X1001#1>, EXF3 <X000#2, X1001#2>,
EXF4 <X011#4>, EXF5 <X011#5> PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
(a) Function
External input signals can be used to switch the feedrate to a value
specified in a parameter. When signals are entered through the
built–in I/O card, only EXF1 to EXF3 are valid.
(b) Signal
EXF1= 1 : The feedrate is switched to a value specified in parameter
No. 1481 (EXFP1).
0 : The feedrate is not switched to a value specified in
parameter No. 1481 (EXFP1).
EXF2= 1 : The feedrate is switched to a value specified in parameter
No. 1482 (EXFP2).
0 : The feedrate is not switched to a value specified in
parameter No. 1482 (EXFP2).
EXF3= 1 : The feedrate is switched to a value specified in parameter
No. 1483 (EXFP3).
0 : The feedrate is not switched to a value specified in
parameter No. 1483 (EXFP3).
EXF4= 1 : The feedrate is switched to a value specified in parameter
No. 1484 (EXFP4).
0 : The feedrate is not switched to a value specified in
parameter No. 1484 (EXFP4).
EXF5= 1 : The feedrate is switched to a value specified in parameter
No. 1485 (EXFP5).
0 : The feedrate is not switched to a value specified in
parameter No. 1485 (EXFP5).
(c) Parameter
1481 EXFP1
1482 EXFP2
1483 EXFP3
1484 EXFP4
1485 EXFP5
372
<X000#0, X1000#0>, EXF2 <X000#1,
X1001#1>, EXF3 <X000#2, X1001#2>,
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE EXF4 <X011#4>, EXF5 <X011#5>
EXFP1 to EXFP5
These feedrates correspond to the EXF1 to EXF5 signals,
respectively.
Range of valid data
Unit of data
IS–B
Metric input 1 mm/min 6 to 15000
Inch input 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000
Rotary axis 1 deg/min 6 to 15000
F mm/min
EXF1 on
20.0
EXF2 on
16.0 EXF3 on
6.0
x mm
0 100.0
(e) Notes
1) Feedrate switching by the EXF1, EXF2, EXF3, EXF4, and EXF5
signals are effective for cutting feed by G31 and G01. They are
ineffective for rapid traverse.
2) The EXF4 and EXF5 signals are effective when I/O card E (DI = 96;
DO = 64) is selected.
3) This function cannot be used together with the multi–skip function
(SKIP2, SKIP3, or SKIP4).
4) Even when this function is being used, the DI signals *FV0 to *FV7
(G012) can be used to override the feedrate with a rate specified in a
parameter.
5) When you are going to apply override, if this function is already being
used by the G31 skip, set parameter No. 6200#7 (SKF).
6) This function cannot be used during multipath control mode.
373
RTN16 <G206#0 TO G211#0>, RTN21
TO RTN26 <G206#1 TO G211#1>,
RTN31 TO RTN36 <G206#2 TO G211#2> PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
374
31. V–READY WAITING SIGNAL
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE (OUTPUT) WVRDY;<F209#4>
31 WVRDY;<F209#4>
This signal is used by the function which disables the servo alarm even
when MCC is turned off (parameter NOFVY (No.1803#2)). it is output
until MCC is turned on.
375
32. SYSTEM THAT DOES NOT
INCORPORATE A PMC PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
376
32. SYSTEM THAT DOES NOT
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE INCORPORATE A PMC
JD1A
JE1 Power magnetics cabinet and
machine operator’s panel
JD1B SKIP, SKIP2, SKIP3, SKIP4,
*ESP, *RILK
(1) The PLC must support the master function of the FANUC I/O Link.
(2) The following signals can be connected to the Power Mate–H internal
I/O (JE1):
*ESP (emergency stop), SKIP, SKIP2, SKIP3, SKIP4 (skip signals),
*RILK (high–speed interlock)
377
32. SYSTEM THAT DOES NOT
INCORPORATE A PMC PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
32.2
SPECIFICATIONS OF (1) For systems that do not incorporate a PMC, a PMC module need not
be installed in the Power Mate–H.
A SYSTEM THAT
(2) The functions that can be used with the Power Mate–H are limited.
DOES NOT Section 32.4 explains which functions are supported. To use a
INCORPORATE A function other than those described in Section 32.4, the PMC module
is required.
PMC
(3) I/O devices such as a built–in I/O card, external I/O card, and I/O unit
connected via the FANUC I/O Link cannot be used.
(4) The following PMC–related functions cannot be used:
D Ladder execution
D Ladder program I/O
D Dynamic ladder display/editing
D Ladder title display/editing
D Detailed PMC alarm display
D PMC trace display
D Display/setting of PMC parameters such as timer, counter, and
keep relay information, and data
(5) Use a motor that incorporates an absolute pulse coder.
See Section 32.5 for details of the reference position return method.
(6) For a system that does not incorporate a PMC, only the following
additional options can be used:
D Part program storage length addition C A02B–0211–J814
D Part program storage length addition D A02B–0211–J827
D Macro executor A02B–0211–J812
D C executor A02B–0211–J734
D Register program count addition A A02B–0211–J815
D Register program count addition B A02B–0211–J816
D Register program count addition C A02B–0211–J817
D Interrupt–type custom macro function A02B–0211–J824
D Direct command A02B–0211–J834
(7) When options that require a PMC module are selected, such as the
handy operator’s panel, the system must incorporate a PMC.
378
32. SYSTEM THAT DOES NOT
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE INCORPORATE A PMC
32.3 On the PLC side, assign the Power Mate–H as a slave with 256 input
points/256 output points. The I/O addresses of the Power Mate–H are
INTERFACE X1020 to X1051, and Y1020 to Y1051.
X1020 to X1051
Y1020 to Y1051
379
32. SYSTEM THAT DOES NOT
INCORPORATE A PMC PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
32.4 The addresses of the interface signals exchanged between the Power
Mate–H, PLC, power magnetics cabinet, and machine operator’s panel
ADDRESS LISTS are indicated below.
X1020 to 1051
PLC³CNC
380
32. SYSTEM THAT DOES NOT
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE INCORPORATE A PMC
X1036 UINT
NOTE
Those addresses to which no signals are assigned, as well
as X1051, must be set to 0.
381
32. SYSTEM THAT DOES NOT
INCORPORATE A PMC PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
CNC!PLC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1020 OP SA STL SPL RWD
Y1022 CUT
Y1024 MZRN
Y1025 MF
NOTE
Those addresses to which no signals are assigned, as well
as Y1041 to Y1051, are undefined.
382
32. SYSTEM THAT DOES NOT
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE INCORPORATE A PMC
32.5 For a system that does not incorporate a PMC, only the reference position
return method described below can be used.
REFERENCE
Reference position return method:
POSITION RETURN
1) Set the emergency stop release state.
2) Perform movement to the point where the reference position is to be
set.
3) Set parameter No. 1815 (APZx) to 1.
When a different reference position is to be set, restore the setting of
parameter No. 1815 (APZx) to 0, then perform the above procedure.
383
33. HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL
<F168 TO F175, G204 TO G205> PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
33 G205>
384
33. HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE <F168 TO F175, G204 TO G205>
33.1 When machine operation mode is selected with the <M–OPE/MDI> key,
handy operator’s panel key input information is output to the F area, as
KEY INPUT ON THE follows:
PANEL
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0168 SW8 SW7 SW6 SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1
1) SWn (n = 1 to 61)
SWn = 0: The corresponding key is not pressed.
SWn = 1: The corresponding key is pressed.
D In MDI mode, SWn = 0 even when the corresponding key is pressed.
D If the cable connected to the Power Mate is disconnected, SWn = 0.
For details of the correspondence between SWn and keys, see the
next page.
2) M–OPE (F169#5)
M–OPE = 0: MDI mode is set.
M–OPE = 1: Machine operation mode is set.
This signal does not indicate whether a key is pressed.
385
33. HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL
<F168 TO F175, G204 TO G205> PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
386
33. HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE <F168 TO F175, G204 TO G205>
33.2 The handy operator’s panel has eleven LED signal points; the nine upper
points can be turned on or off by a ladder program.
LED ON/OFF
INFORMATION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
OUTPUT G204 LED08 LED07 LED06 LED05 LED04 LED03 LED02 LED01
G205 LED09
NOTE
The two LEDs below indicate whether machine operation
mode is selected, and whether MDI mode is selected.
These LEDs cannot be turned on and off by a ladder
program.
M–OPE turned on: Machine operation mode is
selected.
M–OPE turned off: Machine operation mode is not
selected.
MDI turned on: MDI mode is selected.
MDI turned off: MDI mode is not selected.
387
33. HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL
<F168 TO F175, G204 TO G205> PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
33.3
KEY INPUT ON
PANEL OF FANUC
STANDARD UNIT
33.3.1
Alphanumeric Key
Type
(A02B–0211–C020#R)
388
33. HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE <F168 TO F175, G204 TO G205>
33.3.2
Symbolic Key Type
(A02B–0211–C020#S)
389
33. HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL
<F168 TO F175, G204 TO G205> PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
390
33. HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE <F168 TO F175, G204 TO G205>
33.4
FANUC STANDARD
UNIT LED ON/OFF
INFORMATION
OUTPUT
33.4.1
Alphanumeric Key
Type
(A02B–0211–C020#R)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G204 (LED08) (LED07) (LED06) T–STEP T–JOG AUTO (LED02) ALARM
G205 (LED09)
33.4.2
Symbolic Key Type
(A02B–0211–C020#S) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G204 (LED08) (LED07) (LED06) (LED05) (LED04) (LED03) (LED02) (LED01)
G205 (LED09)
391
33. HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL
<F168 TO F175, G204 TO G205> PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
33.5
SUPPLEMENT
33.5.1 To use the handy operator’s panel, the items listed below are required.
Necessary Items (1) CRT module
To enable the use of the handy operator’s panel, a CRT module must
be installed in the Power Mate.
(2) PMC module
To enable the use of the handy operator’s panel, a PMC–PA3 module
must be installed in the Power Mate.
(3) Version of the base printed circuit board
The version number of the base printed circuit board
(A20B–2100–0020, 0021) must be 02B or later.
(4) Version of the basic function
The version number of the basic function (A02B–0211–H501#8880)
must be 9 or later.
33.5.2 When using the handy operator’s panel, set the Power Mate rotary
Setting Items switches as follows:
1) Set RSW to 0.
2) Set MTSW to 3.
33.5.3 When the handy operator’s panel is being used, some restrictions are
Restrictions imposed on the Power Mate functions, as described below.
(1) For CRT display language selection, Japanese cannot be selected with
bit 0 (JPN) of parameter No. 3102. Other languages cannot be
selected either. Only an English–language display is supported.
(2) The help function cannot be used.
(3) The following PMC–related functions cannot be used:
D Dynamic ladder diagram display/editing
D Ladder title display/editing
D Detailed PMC alarm display
D PMC trace display
D Display/setting of PMC parameters such as timer, counter, and keep
relay information, as well as data
D Ladder I/O operations (such as load and save operations via the
RS–232C interface)
(4) The characters that can be used with the macro executor are limited.
With the macro executor, only the following characters can be used.
1. Standard characters
Alphabetic characters (uppercase and lowercase), numbers, kana
characters, blanks, plus sign, minus sign, decimal point, equal
sign, comma, ruled lines, etc.
The internal codes of the usable characters are 0020 to 00DF, and
2F61 to 2F6B.
2. Triple–size characters
Alphabetic characters, numbers, blanks, minus sign, decimal
point
392
33. HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE <F168 TO F175, G204 TO G205>
The internal codes of the usable characters are 0020, 002D, 002E,
0030 to 0039, and 0041 to 005A.
For details, refer to “Power Mate–D Programming Language (Macro
Compiler/Macro Executor) (B–62093–1).”
(5) The characters that can be used with the C executor are limited. With
the C executor, only the following characters can be used.
1. JIS codes: 0020 to 004F, 0061 to 007A, 00A0 to 00DF
2. Single–byte character code table
Graphic character set #1 – – ESC(1 ! 00C5 to 00CF
Standard character set – – ESC(4 ! 0020 to 004F
0061 to 007A
00A0 to 00DF
Large character set – – ESC(6 ! 002D, 002E
0030 to 0039
0041 to 005A
3. FANUC character code table
0020 to 005F, 00A0 to 00DF, 0100 to 01E1, 01E4 to 01EE
(6) The simultaneous block start function cannot be used.
(7) The handy operator’s panel cannot be used together with the
CRT/MDI unit; the separate CRT unit cannot be used together with
the separate MDI unit; the separate PDP unit cannot be used together
with the separate MDI unit; the separate LCD unit cannot be used
together with the separate MDI unit. Switching using a switch unit
is not possible.
(8) When a DPL/MDI unit is connected to the Power Mate, the handy
operator’s panel displays the position display screen at all times; all
operations other than those using the emergency stop button,
deadman’s switches, and deadman’s switch enable switch are
disabled.
393
APPENDIX
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
Number
Classification Name of
Figure
Control unit CONTROL UNIT Fig. 1
I/O I/O CARD D, E Fig. 2
Unit for display CRT/MDI UNIT, LCD/MDI UNIT Fig. 3
and data input CRT/MDI UNIT WITH PICTURE DISPLAY
SEPARATE CRT UNIT Fig. 4
SEPARATE MDI UNIT, Fig. 5
SEPARATE MDI UNIT WITH PICTURE DISPLAY
SEPARATE PDP UNIT Fig. 6
SEPARATE LCD UNIT Fig. 7
DETACHABLE LCD/MDI UNIT Fig. 8
HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL Fig. 9
DPL/MDI UNIT (TABLE MOUNT), Fig. 10
DUST PROTECTED TYPE DPL/MDI (TABLE MOUNT),
LONG DISTANCE TYPE DPL/MDI UNIT (TABLE MOUNT)
DPL/MDI UNIT (WALE MOUNT), Fig. 11
DUST PROTECTED TYPE DPL/MDI (WALE MOUNT),
LONG DISTANCE TYPE DPL/MDI UNIT (WALE MOUNT)
External device PUNCH PANEL (WIDE WIDTH TYPE) Fig. 12
PUNCH PANEL (NARROW WIDTH TYPE) Fig. 13
PUNCH PANEL (WITH 24V TERMINAL BOARD) Fig. 14
FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE Fig. 15
FANUC Handy File Fig. 16
CRT LINK TERMINAL UNIT, Fig. 17
TOUCH PANEL TERMINAL UNIT
I/O Link CONNECTION UNIT Fig. 18
HSSB ADAPTOR Fig. 19
397
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
Specification : A02B–0211–B501
A02B–0211–B511
Air out
Air in
Weight : 2.2Kg
398
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
399
Fig. 2
I/O CARD D, E
4–5mm CP1
50 mm 10
336 mm
mm
15 mm
JD1B (1) (2) (3)
12 12
43
CP1
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
JD1A
CP61
35
400
155
APPENDIX
154 mm
120 mm
A16B–2202–0732 (DI/DO=96/64)
Specification : A16B–2202–0733 (DI/DO=48/32)
CMB4
17.78 mm
CMB3 CM52 CM51
MR20RM
MR50RM MR50RM MR50RM
20 50 50 50
11.72
mm
31.05 mm 46.99 mm 88.9 mm 88.9 mm 66.16 mm
Approx. 100 mm
7 mm 322 mm
B–62683EN/03
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
Fig. 3 CRT/MDI UNIT, LCD/MDI UNIT, CRT/MDI UNIT WITH PICTURE DISPLAY
Weight : 5.8kg
401
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
Specification : A02B–0120–C111
184
190
244
250
4–M3
Panel cut drawing
260 2
4–ø4 5 5
250 22 220
5
200
190
5
Back side
402
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
Fig. 5 SEPARATE MDI UNIT, SEPARATE MDI UNIT WITH PICTURE DISPLAY
Weight : 1.3kg
403
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
Specification : A02B–0200–C100
2
22 95MAX
5
200 190
30
5 250 5
260
5
130 88
CN2 CN1
19.5
33
17.5
23
450 Connector for CRT video signal
404
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
Specification : A02B–0166–C251
Weight : 1.6 kg
405
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
Weight : 7.0 kg
406
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
Display
LED key
sheet
Deadman’s switch enable switch Operator’s panel Emergency stop Deadman’s switch
key sheet button
Tolerance: 1 mm
Weight : 1.3 kg
407
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
Weight : 0.4kg
408
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
Weight : 0.4kg
409
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
80
5
13
5
125
410
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
40
20 13
5
2 M3
5
100 115
20
411
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
HONDA
Connector : PCR–E20FA
Cover : PCR–E20CA
(Note) Provide a grounding terminal for the frame ground near the punch panel.
412
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
Adaptor
Floppy
413
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
414
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
9.5
21 11.4
HONDA
37
30
Weight : Approx. 30g
415
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
Unit : mm
180
10 160
30
Cable Cable
Components
Up to 50
Outside dimensions
4–M4
Installation dimensions
Weight : 600g
416
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
Specification : A02B–0211–C220
417
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
418
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX EACH CONNECTOR
Number
Name of
Figure
PCR CONNECTOR Fig. 1
FI40 CONNECTOR Fig. 2
CONNECTOR CASE (HONDA PCR TYPE) Fig. 3
CONNECTOR CASE (HIROSE FI TYPE) Fig. 4
CONNECTOR CASE (FUJITSU FCN TYPE) Fig. 5
AMP CONNECTOR (1) TYPE X Fig. 6
AMP CONNECTOR (2) TYPE Y Fig. 7
CONTACT FOR AMP CONNECTOR Fig. 8
HONDA CONNECTOR (CASE) Fig. 9
HONDA CONNECTOR (FEMALE) Fig. 10
HONDA CONNECTOR (MALE) Fig. 11
HONDA CONNECTOR (TERMINAL LAYOUT) Fig. 12
CONNECTOR MADE BY FCI (3 PINS, BROWN) Fig. 13
CONNECTOR MADE BY FCI (6 PINS, BROWN) Fig. 14
READER PUNCHER PANEL CONNECTOR Fig. 15
READER PUNCHER CONNECTOR METAL FITTING FOR LOCK Fig. 16
FASTON TERMINAL Fig. 17
419
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
EACH CONNECTOR APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
A
n
2 1.27 1
7.3
n n)1
2
Display
HONDA
7
15.1
1.27
B
21.65 11.43
420
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX EACH CONNECTOR
DIMENSION
16.25 15°
11.43
1.27
NOTE
This connector does not
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
have contacts for positions
5.5
2.2
1.7
9.2 11,13,15,17, and 19.
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
13.35
19.2
Tab for
shield
connection
7
4.3
3
5
8.5
1.8
A A
2.4 2.4
Section AA S 20 18 16 14 12
(Standard 1/10)
See from the back (soldering side)
10 8 6 4 2
9 7 5 3 1
421
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
EACH CONNECTOR APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
DIMENSION 9.5
21 11.4
HONDA
37
30
Case
Cable clamp
Lock bracket
Lock lever
Set screw for cable clamp
422
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX EACH CONNECTOR
Case
Cable clamp
Lock bracket
Lock lever
Set screw for cable clamp
21±0.3
11.5±0.3
9.5±0.2
37±0.5
17.5±0.3
30±0.3
423
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
EACH CONNECTOR APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
9.5
21 11.4
F
C020–02
37
30
Cable clamp
Screw
Lock lever
424
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX EACH CONNECTOR
3 2 1
AMP D–3
X 22.8
16.3
16.7
0.6
7.62
3.81
7.15
4.05
6.55
3.1
3 2 1
Circuit No.
425
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
EACH CONNECTOR APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
3 2 1
AMP D–3
Y
22.8
16.3
16.7
0.6
7.62
3.81
7.15
4.05
6.55
3.1
3 2 1
Circuit No.
426
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX EACH CONNECTOR
±0.5
2.9
1
3
±0.5 B-B
17.8
±0.4
(9.3) (2.5) 4.2
B
2.9±0.2 A
±0.5
±0.2
5.5
3.4
–AMP
2.5±0.2
427
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
EACH CONNECTOR APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
A set of HONDA connectors and cases is available from FANUC. See the HONDA connector
(male/female) specifications.
C
A (D)
(B)
Symbol
Specification A (B) C (D)
For 20 pin 39.3 44.9 39.8 17
For 50 pin 67.9 73.5 44.8 18
Symbol Name
Outer diameter of the cable
1 Connector cover MR–20L dia.10mm max
2 Cable clamp MR–50L dia.16mm max
3 Stopper
4 Screw for cable clamp
Plug (MR–20, 50MH)
5
Jack (MR–20, 50FH)
428
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX EACH CONNECTOR
2–M2
13
A
B
2.4
18.1
6
8.5
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
HONDA
8 9 10 11 12 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A B Symbol Name
1 Cable clamp
20 pins 32.8 27.8
2 Screw 2.6dia.×8
50 pins 61.4 56.4
3 Connector
429
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
EACH CONNECTOR APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
2–M2
13
B
A
2.4
19.9
8.4
10.9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
HONDA
8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
A B Symbol Name
1 Cable clamp
20 pins 32.8 27.8
2 Screw 2.6dia.×8
20 pins 61.4 56.4
3 Connector
430
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX EACH CONNECTOR
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
HONDA
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
HONDA
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
HONDA
8 9 10 11 12 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
HONDA
8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
431
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
EACH CONNECTOR APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
0.2
3
32 max.
19.06
5.08
2
1
6 0.2
7.7
30
432
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX EACH CONNECTOR
5.08
5
38 max.
48 max.
4
3
1
2
1
7 max.
24.9
433
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
EACH CONNECTOR APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
H
J
A 53.0 D 7.8 G 10.7
B 38.3 E 12.6 H 1.2
C 47.0 F 41.3 J 0.8
A
C
A–A F
A B cross section 10
A
E G
D
6.1 10
2–3.05ö 10.8
10
Small round
M2.6×P0.45 screw Interlock screw head screw
1.2 groove
6.1
12.7
1.2
6.2 Spring washer
434
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX EACH CONNECTOR
Specification : A02B–0166–K330
7.62
Applicable wire :
A cross–section of 1.25 to 2.27 mm2
7.75
21.59
435
C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS
AND CABLES APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
Cable connector The cable connector is separated into a body and a housing. The
connectors available are shown below. Models marked with (*) have
been customized for FANUC; those not so marked are mass produced as
standard products.
HONDA PCR–V20LA*
TSUSHIN PCR–V20LB*
(Plastic)
Pulse Connector HIROSE FI40–2015S*
coder and body ELECTRIC (Solder type with
coaxial 15 pins)
cable Housing HIROSE FI–20–CV*
ELECTRIC (Plastic)
436
C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX AND CABLES
Solder type
Connector : PCR–E20FS (HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.) or
FI40–2015S (HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD.)
Wires of 20 AWG or smaller can be soldered to the connector. HONDA
TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD. However, soldering many of these wires
together lowers work efficiency because the pitch of the soldering portion
of the connector is too small to support it.
Cable wires Cable wires generally need to be developed or ordered by the machine tool
builder for the Power Mate.
FANUC has developed wires that specifically suit the interface connector.
They are listed in the table below, for your convenience when ordering
from the manufacturer.
Cable FANUC
Use Structure Manufacturer Remarks
type specification No.
10–pair General purpose Ten 0.08mm2 pairs A66L–0001–0284 #10P HITACHI CABLE, LTD.
cable OKI ELECTRIC CABLE.,
LTD.
6–pair CRT interface Six 0.08mm2 pairs A66L–0001–0295 HITACHI CABLE, LTD. 20m
cable (for press–mount connector) maximum
6–core CRT interface Coaxial six cores A66L–0001–0296 HITACHI CABLE, LTD. 50m
coaxial (for long distances) maximum
cable
Composite External pulse Six 0.05mm2 wires A66L–0001–0286 HITACHI CABLE, LTD. 20m
12–core generators and three 0.18mm2 OKI ELECTRIC CABLE., maximum
cable pairs LTD. (NOTE)
(NOTE)
NOTE
The Power Mate can feed power to an external pulse
generator operating on a +5 V power supply, provided the
power supply rating does not exceed 0.35 A. An
appropriate cable must be selected, taking the supply
voltage drop caused by the cable resistance into
consideration. When power is fed from the Power Mate
using A66L–0001–0286 cable, the cable length must not
exceed 20 m. If a longer cable is required, a cable having
a lower resistance (for example, A66L–0001–0157) should
be used.
437
C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS
AND CABLES APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
10–pair cable
438
C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX AND CABLES
The numbers assigned to the wires correspond to the numbers in the table at right.
Dot mark
Insulator color
color
(1 pitch)
Dot mark
Pair No.
Drain First Second
wire wire wire
1
Twisted
1 Orange Red Black
The numbers assigned to the wires correspond to the numbers in the table at right.
439
C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS
AND CABLES APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
12–core cable
D Specifications
NOTE
The maximum outside diameter applies to portions other
than the drain wire.
440
C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX AND CABLES
Drain wire
Red
0.18–mm2 twisted pair wire
7
6 White 1
Red Black 0.5–mm2 insulated wire
441
C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS
AND CABLES APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
Specification – A66L–0001–0296
Diameter mm 0.48
Thickness mm 0.17
Diameter mm 1.90
Density % 90 or more
Diameter mm 2.10
Thickness mm 0.15
Diameter mm 2.4
Thickness mm 0.7
442
C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX AND CABLES
Coaxial Core
White
Thread
Yellow Black
Blue Red
Tape
Green
Sheath
Inside Conductor
Insulator
Jacket
443
C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS
AND CABLES APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
A66L
Cable B
ø0.55mm 7/0.18 1.7mm ø12.5mm 106W/km 1.6A –0001
(50 core)
–0042
Total shield
Individual shield
(for tachogenerator
signal)
444
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX D. INTERFACE CABLE
D INTERFACE CABLE
Cables
J40 External pulse generator cable: JA12 – External pulse generator 50m
NOTE
Each maximum allowable cable length relates to the use of the cable for an interface signal.
For some cables (such as that for a pulse coder) that contain a power cable, however, an
additional limit, based on a drop in the supply voltage, is imposed.
445
D. INTERFACE CABLE APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
Magnetic cabinet
Operator’s panel
MR–20LFH MR–50LMH
ø10
A02B–
J91 0029– 7m
K802
A02B–
J6 0118– 7m
K821
J22
A03B–
Cable in which ten twisted pairs are
0807– 5m
shielded all together
K801
A66L–0001–0284#10P
446
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX D. INTERFACE CABLE
A02B–
J24 0124– 5m
K831
Vinyl wire
A02B–
J30
0124– 5m
J48
K830
J93 A02B–
to 0120– 5m
J98 K800
A02B–
J43,
0124– 5m
J44
K811
447
D. INTERFACE CABLE APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
A02B–
J45,
0124– 5m
J46
K814
A02B–
J86,
0124– 50cm
J87
K841
A02B–
To flat cable 0124– 1m
K841
448
E. DISPLAYING AND SETTING
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX PARAMETERS
449
E. DISPLAYING AND SETTING
PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
Procedure for CRT/MDI 1 Set 1 for PARAMETER WRITE to enable writing. See the procedure
for enabling/disabling parameter writing described below.
>_
MDI **** *** *** ALM
[ PARAM ][ DGNOS ][ PMC ][ SYSTEM ][ (OPRT) ]
PAGE
and , and cursor keys, , , , and .
5 To set the parameter, enter a new value with numeric keys and press
soft key [INPUT]. The parameter is set to the entered value and the
value is displayed.
6 Set 0 for PARAMETER WRITE to disable writing.
450
E. DISPLAYING AND SETTING
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX PARAMETERS
Procedure for DPL/MDI Press the <DGNOS/PARAM> key to toggle between the parameter
screen and diagnostic screen.
>D0000 00000000
D0001 00000000
Procedure for CRT/MDI 1 Select the MDI mode or enter state emergency stop.
>_
MDI **** *** *** ALM
[ OFFSET ][ SETING ][ ][ ][ (OPRT) ]
7 Depress the RESET key to release the alarm condition. If alarm No. 000
has occurred, however, turn off the power supply and then turn it on,
otherwise the alarm is not released.
451
E. DISPLAYING AND SETTING
PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
Procedure for DPL/MDI 1 Press the <VAR> key to display the settings screen.
2 Use the cursor keys to position the cursor at PWE.
3 Press the <1> key and the <INPUT> key, in that order, to enable
parameters to be written. The CNC unit will generate P/S alarm 100.
4 Press the <DGNOS/PARAM> key to display the parameter screen.
>&0001 00000000
&0002 00000000
Explanations
D Parameters that require Some parameters are not effective until the power is turned off and on
turning off the power again after they are set. Setting such parameters causes alarm 000. In this
case, turn off the power, then turn it on again.
D Setting data Some parameters can be set on the setting screen if the parameter list
indicates ”Setting entry is acceptable”. Setting 1 for PARAMETER
WRITE is not necessary when these parameters are set on the setting
screen.
452
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX F. INPUTTING PARAMETERS
F INPUTTING PARAMETERS
Parameters are loaded into the memory of the controller unit from a floppy
or Handy File. The input format is the same as the output format. When
a parameter is loaded which has the same data number as a parameter
already registered in the memory, the loaded parameter replaces the
existing parameter.
453
F. INPUTTING PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
Inputting parameters
Procedure (CRT/MDI) 1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading.
2 When using a floppy, search for the required file according to the
procedure.
3 Press the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine operator’s
panel.
Procedure (DPL/MDI) 1 Press the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine side.
2 The parameter screen is selected by pressing the <PARAM> key.
3 Set PWE on the setting screen to 1. Alarm PS100 is displayed at this
time.
4 Perform the same operation as for program input.
5 NC parameters are input to the memory by this operation. Normally,
alarm PS000 will activate after completion of parameter reading.
Normally, P/S alarm 000 is generated after parameters have finished
being read in.
6 Set PWE on the setting parameter to 0.
7 Turn on the Power–Mate power again if PS alarm activates.
8 Release the emergency stop button of machine side.
454
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX G. OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS
G OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS
All parameters are output in the defined format from the memory of the
.controller to a floppy or Handy file.
455
G. OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
Outputting parameters
Procedure (CRT/MDI) 1 Make sure the output device is ready for output.
2 Specify the punch code system (ISO or EIA) using a parameter.
3 Select the EDIT mode.
>C000 00000000
WRITE
Explanations
D Output format Output format is as follows:
N ... P .... ;
N ... A1P ..... A2P ... AnP ... ;
N ... P ... ;
456
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
H DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
NOTE
1 For the bit type and bit axis type parameters, a single data
number is assigned to 8 bits. Each bit has a different
meaning.
2 The axis type allows data to be set separately for each
control axis.
3 The valid data range for each data type indicates a general
range. The range varies according to the parameters. For
the valid data range of a specific parameter, see the
explanation of the parameter.
457
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
WARNING
Parameters not described in this document may appear on
the Power Mate–H screen.
Such parameters are invalid. Do not set data for them, or
otherwise an unexpected operation may result.
458
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
H.1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
PARAMETERS OF
0000 SEQ INI ISO TVC
SETTING
Setting entry is acceptable.
Data type: Bit
TVC TV check
0: Not performed
1: Performed
ISO Code used for data output
0: EIA code
1: ISO code
INI Unit of input
0: In mm
1: In inches
SEQ Automatic insertion of sequence numbers
0: Not performed
1: Performed
NOTE
When a program is prepared by using MDI keys in the part
program storage and edit mode, a sequence number can
automatically be assigned to each block in set increments.
Set the increment to parameter 3216.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
NOTE
RMVx functions when the RMBx bit of parameter No. 1005
is set to 1.
459
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
Power Mate
Channel 1
JD5
RS-232-C
Reader/
puncher
I/O CHANNEL=0
or
I/O CHANNEL=1
NOTE
1 The input/output device used can be selected (parameter
0020) also on the setting screen. Using the setting screen
is a more common method for selecting the device.
2 The specified data, such as a baud rate and the number of
stop bits, of an input/output device connected to a specific
channel must be set in parameters for that channel in
advance. See Section H.2 “Parameters of Reader/Puncher
Interface.”
I/O CHANNEL=0 and I/O CHANNEL=1 both refer to
channel 1. For each, parameters to set the baud rate, the
number of stop bits, and other data are provided separately.
3 JD5 is number of connector on the printed circuit boards.
460
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
461
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
NOTE
Set NFD to 1 at normal usually.
0102 Number specified for the input/output device (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0)
462
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
0112 Number specified for the input/output device (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1)
463
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
H.3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
PARAMETERS OF
1001 INM
AXIS CONTROL/
INCREMENT SYSTEM
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off
before operation is continued.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
NOTE
Availability or disability of function setting the dogless
reference position can be specified for each axis by DLZx,
bit 1 of parameter 1005 , when DLZ set to 0.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
NOTE
Be sure to set 0 for Power Mate–H.
IPR Whether the least input increment for each axis is set to a value
10 times as large as the least command increment is specified.
0: The least input increment is not set to a value 10 times as
large as the least command increment.
464
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
NOTE
When DLZ of parameter 1002 is 0, parameter 1005 is
enabled. When DLZ of parameter 1002 is 1, parameter
1005 is disabled, and the function for setting the reference
position without dogs is enabled for all axes.
NOTE
When RMBx is 1 , the setting to cancel the axis is available
in parameter No. 0012#7 RMVx.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
NOTE
When this parameter is changed, turn off the power before
continuing operation.
465
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
NOTE
For the rotation axis, switching between inch and mm units
is not performed. When the rotation axis is set, the machine
coordinate system is normalized to the range 0 to 360
degrees. Automatic return to the reference position (G28
and G30) is performed in the direction executed by the
manual reference position return, and the amount of travel
is within one rotation. A normalized value can be changed
by setting a value for parameter No. 1260.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
NOTE
ROAx specifies the function only for a rotation axis (for
which ROTx, #0 of parameter No. 1006, is set to 1)
NOTE
RABx is valid only when ROAx is 1.
NOTE
1 RRLx is valid only when ROAx is 1.
2 Assign the amount of the shift per one rotation in parameter
No. 1260.
466
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
1009 ZEXx
1020 Name of the axis used for programming for each axis
467
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
NOTE
The same axis name cannot be assigned to more than one
axis.
NOTE
When this parameter is set, power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
468
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
H.4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
PARAMTERS OF
1201 ZPI ZPR
COORDINATES
Data type: Bit
ZPR Automatic setting of a coordinate system when manual return
to the reference position is performed
0: Not set automatically
1: Set automatically
NOTE
When an absolute pulse coder is used, set ”ZPR” to 1
without fail.
Coordinate value of the first reference position on each axis in the machine
1240 coordinate system
Coordinate value of the third reference position on each axis in the machine
1242 coordinate system
469
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
Coordinate value of the reference position on each axis used for setting a
1251 coordinate system automatically when input is performed in inches
NOTE
This parameter is valid when ZPI in parameter 1201 is set
to 1.
NOTE
After setting the parameter, turn off the power once and turn
it on again to operate the machine.
470
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
H.5
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
PARAMETERS OF
1300 BFA LZR
STROKE LIMIT
Data type: Bit
BFA When a command that exceeds a stored stroke limit is issued
0: An alarm is generated after the stroke limit exceeded.
1: An alarm is generated before the stroke limit exceeded.
Software stroke limit alarms
Alarm 500 : The positive stored stroke limit is
exceeded.
Alarm 501 : The negative stored stroke limit is
exceeded.
LZR Checking of stored stroke limits during the time from
power-on to manual return to the reference position
0: The stroke limits are checked.
1: The stroke limits are not checked.
NOTE
When the parameters are set as follows, the stroke
becomes infinite: parameter 1320 < parameter 1321
For movement along the axis for which infinite stroke is set,
only incremental commands are available. If an absolute
command is issued for this axis, the absolute register may
overflow, and normal movement will not result.
471
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
H.6
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
PARAMETERS OF
1401 RDR RFO RPD
FEEDRATE
Data type: Bit
RPD Manual rapid traverse during the period from power-on time
to the completion of return to the reference position
0: Disabled (Manual continuous feed is performed.)
1: Enabled
RFO When cutting feedrate override is 0% during rapid traverse,
0: The machine tool does not stop moving.
1: The machine tool stops moving.
RDR Dry run for rapid traverse command
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Set the dry run rate when the jog feedrate is overridden by 100%.
472
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
Set the rapid traverse rate when the rapid traverse override is 100%
for each axis.
Set the F0 rate of the rapid traverse override for each axis.
Rapid traverse override signal
Override value
val e
ROV2 ROV1
0 0 100 %
0 1 50 %
1 0 25 %
1 1 F0
F0:Parameter No.1421
473
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
Set the continuous manual feedrate when the override of the jog
feedrate is 100%.
Set the rate of manual rapid traverse when the rapid traverse override
is 100% for each axis.
NOTE
If 0 is set, the rate set in parameter 1420 is assumed.
Set a feedrate (FL rate) after deceleration when return to the reference
position is performed for each axis.
474
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
NOTE
When 0 is set for all axes, the feedrate is clamped to the
maximum allowable cutting feedrate specified in parameter
No. 1422.
1481 EXFP 1
1482 EXFP 2
1483 EXFP 3
1484 EXFP 4
1485 EXFP 5
475
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
H.7
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
PARAMETERS OF
1601 NCI RTO OVL
ACCELERATION/
DECELERATION Data type: Bit
CONTROL OVL Block overlap between cutting feed blocks
0: Not performed
1: Performed
RTO 0: Disables block overlap between rapid traverse blocks.
1: Enables block overlap between rapid traverse blocks.
NCI Imposition check at deceleration
0: Performed
1: Not performed (Exact stop check dose not performed too.)
Standard #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
setting 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
1602 FWB
476
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
F2 F2
Type B
F1 Time F1 Time
N1 N2 N1 N2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
NOTE
To use bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation, set this parameter to 0, and select the
acceleration/deceleration using CTBx , bit 1 of parameter
No. 1610.
Parameter
Acceleration/deceleration
CTBx CTLx
0 0 Exponential acceleration/deceleration
0 1 Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
1 0 Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpola-
tion
477
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
<Linear acceleration/deceleration during rapid traverse> <Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration for rapid traverse>
Feedrate
Feedrate Rapid
traverse rate
Rapid
traverse rate
0
Time Time
T T T2/2 T1 T2/2
T2
T: Time constant for linear acceleration/deceleration T1: Time constant under linear acceleration/deceleration
T2: Time for corner rounding
Total time=T1+T2
Time for linear part=T1–T2
Time for curved part=T2
478
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
NOTE
1 Set time constant T1 for bell-shaped acceleration /
deceleration during rapid traverse in parameter No. 1620,
and set time constant T2 in this parameter. For information
about time constants T1 and T2, see the description of
parameter No. 1620.
2 When this parameter is set to 0, linear acceleration/
deceleration is used during rapid traverse. (The time
constant specified in parameter No. 1620 is used for linear
acceleration/deceleration.)
479
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
Feedrate
Time
T
T: Total time. It is constant irrespective of feed rate.
(Time constant is constant).
480
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
Feedrate
Time
Parameter 2
NOTE
When either parameter No. 1630 or parameter No. 1631 is
set to 0, linear acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation is disabled.
481
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
Feedrate [mm/min]
Time [msec]
80
NOTE
1 When either parameter No. 1630 or parameter No. 1631 is
set to 0, linear acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation is disabled.
2 Set parameter Nos. 1630 and 1631 to satisfy: (Parameter
No. 1630)/(Parameter No. 1631) y 5
Rapid traverse rate deceleration ratio for overlap between rapid traverse
1722 blocks
NOTE
If two consecutive rapid traverse blocks (such as G00) direct
the same axis to move in opposite directions, overlapping
does not occur.
482
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
H.8
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
PARAMETERS OF
1800 CVR
SERVO
Data type: Bit
CVR When velocity control ready signal VRDY is set ON before
position control ready signal PRDY comes ON
0: A servo alarm is generated. (SV404)
1: A servo alarm is not generated.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
0 1
Bit 4 (CCI) of 0 Rapid traverse ! No. 1826 Rapid traverse ! No. 1826
parameter Rapid traverse Rapid traverse
No. 1801 Rapid traverse ! No. 1826 Rapid traverse ! No. 1826
Cutting feed Cutting feed
Cutting feed ! No. 1826 Cutting feed ! No. 1826
Rapid traverse Rapid traverse
1 Rapid traverse ! No. 1826 Rapid traverse ! No. 1826
Rapid traverse Rapid traverse
Rapid traverse ! No. 1826 Rapid traverse ! No. 1826
Cutting feed Cutting feed
Cutting feed ! No. 1826 Cutting feed ! No. 1827
Rapid traverse Rapid traverse
483
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
NOTE
When torque restriction is not in effect, in-position checks
and checks during stopping and movement are performed,
regardless of the setting of this parameter.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
NOTE
When this parameter has been set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
484
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
NOTE
When an absolute position transducer is used, after primary
adjustment is performed or after the absolute position
transducer is replaced, this parameter must be set to 0,
power must be turned off and on, then manual reference
position return must be performed. This completes the
positional correspondence between the machine position
and the position on the absolute position transducer, and
sets this parameter to 1 automatically.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
NOTE
When this parameter has been set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
NOTE
When the flexibly feed gear is used, do not use these
parameters. Set the numerator and denominator of DMR
to an appropriate values in parameters 2084 and 2085
respectively.
NOTE
When this parameter has been set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
485
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
+
CMR Error counter DA To velocity control
Least command * converter
increment
Feedback pulse
Reference DMR Position
counter Detection detector
unit
Set the magnification ratios of CMR and DMR so that the weight of
positive inputs to the error counter equals that of negative inputs.
Least command increment/CMR = detection unit = feedback pulse
increment/DMR
The feedback pulse unit varies according to the type of transducer.
Feedback pulse unit = the amount of travel per rotation of the pulse
coder/the number of pulses per rotation of the pulse coder
As the size of the reference counter, specify the grid interval for return
to the reference position in the grid method.
Size of the reference counter = Grid interval/detection unit
Grid interval = the amount of travel per rotation of the pulse coder
The value set in the parameter is obtained as follows:
(1) When command multiply is 1/2 to 1/27
Set value + 1 ) 100
(Command multiply)
Valid data range: 102 to 127
(2) When command multiply is 1 to 48
Set value = 2 command multiply
Valid data range: 2 to 96
NOTE
When command multiply is 1 to 48, the set value must be
determined so that an integer can be set for command
multiply.
486
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
NOTE
When this parameter has been set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
487
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
1829 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in the stopped state
NOTE
When this parameter has been set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
488
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
(Special Note)
When this value is set to 0, torque restriction is not performed
by this parame-ter. (In this case, the torque value set by the DI
signals and PMC go into effect.)
1872 Value for checking the degree of position deviation of the servo
489
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
The following parameters are not explained in this manual, therefore see
parameter manual of servo for details;
490
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
491
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
492
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
H.9
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
PARAMETERS OF
3001 MHI BIO RWM STON
DI/DO
Data type: Bit
STON 0: Activate automatic operation when the automatic
operation activation signal (ST) goes from 1 to 0.
1: Activate automatic operation when the automatic
operation activation signal (ST) goes from 0 to 1.
RWM Specifies how the rewind in-progress signal (RWD) is to be
output.
0: The RWD signal is output with the reset and rewind signal
(RRW) only when the tape reader is being rewound.
1: The RWD signal is output with the reset and rewind signal
(RRW) when the tape reader is being rewound or
programs in memory are being rewound.
BIO Direct reference signal these are Emergency stop/High–speed
interlock/Skip/Deceleation signal for reference point return
for Power Mate
0: Use the external I/O
1: Use the internal I/O or built–in I/O
MHI Exchange of strobe and completion signals for the M code.
0: Normal (FIN : G004.3 is used)
1: High-speed (MFIN : G005.0 is used)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
493
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
NOTE
When above signals are set as unused , its are able to use
for others.
M code
MF signal
Delay time
NOTE
The time is counted in units of 8 ms. If the set value is not
a multiple of eight, it is raised to the next multiple of eight.
[Example] When 30 is set, 32 ms is assumed.
When 32 is set, 32 ms is assumed.
When 100 is set, 104 ms is assumed.
494
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
M code
MF signal
FIN signal
NOTE
The time is counted in units of 8 ms. If the set value is not
a multiple of eight, it is raised to the next multiple of eight.
[Example] When 30 is set, 32 ms is assumed.
NOTE
Manual feedrate override is input using the manual feedrate
override signal (*JV0 to *JV15).
495
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
RST signal output time = time required for reset + parameter value
16 ms
NOTE
M800/M900-level codes are used in waiting function for
other codes or simultaneous block start function.
496
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
H.10
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
PARAMETERS OF
3102 SPN ITA FRN GRM JPN
CRT/MDI, DISPLAY,
AND EDIT Data type: Bit
NOTE
When this parameter is set, turn off the power once. Then
turn it on for machining.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
NOTE
When PPD is set to 1 and the absolute position display is
preset by one of the following, the relative position display
is also preset to the same value as the absolute position
display:
1 Manual return to the reference position
2 Setting of a coordinate system by G92
497
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
3109 SFM
NOTE
See Sec. H.14 for details of pattern date input screen.
Pattern data can be used only when a CRT, PDP, or LCD is
available.
498
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
NOTE
When MSCL is set to 1, message data must end with
@03@.
3170 CRTMAX
3171 EQUPA
L L
3176 EQUPF
499
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
500
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
3203 MCL
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
3204 CEX
501
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
502
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
H.11
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
PARAMETERS OF
PROGRAMS 3401 ABS MAB DPI
NOTE
ABS functions when the MAB bit of parameter No. 3401 is
set to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
503
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
L L
3420 M code preventing buffering 10
504
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
H.12
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
PARAMETERS OF
5001 EVO TAL TLB TLC
TOOL
COMPENSATION Data type: Bit
TLC Tool length compensation
0: Tool length compensation A or B (Conforms to TLB in
parameter No. 5001)
1: Tool length compensation C
TLB Tool length compensation axis
0: Always Z axis irrespective of plane specification (Tool
length compensation A)
1: Axis perpendicular to plane specification (G17, G18, and
G19) (Tool length compensation B)
TAL Tool length compensation C
0: Generates an alarm when two or more axes are offset
1: Not generate an alarm even if two or more axes are offset
EVO Specifies whether an offset is effective in the next block to be
buffered or the next block for which an H code is specified or
subsequent blocks when the offset is changed for tool length
compensation A or B.
0: Next block to be buffered or subsequent blocks
1: Next block for which an H code is specified or subsequent
blocks
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
5003 LVK
505
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
H.13
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
PARAMETERS OF
6000 SBM
CUSTOM MACROS
Data type: Bit
SBM Custom macro statement
0: Not stop the single block
1: Stops the single block
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
6010 *7 *6 *5 *4 *3 *2 *1 *0
6011 =7 =6 =5 =4 =3 =2 =1 =0
6012 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6013 [7 [6 [5 [4 [3 [2 [1 [0
6014 ]7 ]6 ]5 ]4 ]3 ]2 ]1 ]0
NOTE
The numeral of a suffix indicates the bit position in a code.
506
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
NOTE
These parameters can be used when MPR, #4 of parameter
No. 6003, is 1. M96 is used as a valid M code and M97 is
used as an invalid M code when MPR is 0, irrespective of the
state of this parameter.
6050 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9010
6051 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9011
6052 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9012
6053 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9013
6054 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9014
6055 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9015
6056 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9016
6057 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9017
6058 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9018
6059 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9019
NOTE
Setting value 0 is invalid. No custom macro can be called
by G00.
507
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
NOTE
Setting value 0 is invalid. No sub program can be called by
M00.
6080 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9020
6081 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9021
6082 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9022
6083 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9023
6084 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9024
6085 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9025
6086 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9026
6087 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9027
6088 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9028
6089 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9029
NOTE
Setting value 0 is invalid. No custom macro can be called
by M00.
6090 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9004
6091 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9005
NOTE
Set 0 when no subprogram is called
508
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
3) At this point, pressing the [MENU] key causes the menu screen to
appear.
When bit 3 (SFM) of parameter No. 3109 is set to 1:
1) Pressing the OFFSET
SETTING key causes page 1 of the soft key display to appear.
6110 PDTOPA
509
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
H.15
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
PARAMETER OF
6200 SKF
SKIP FUNCTION,
PICTURE DISPLAY, Data type: Bit
AND ITP SKF Dry run, override, and automatic acceleration/deceleration for
G31 skip command
SYNCHRONOUS
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
6206 DSK
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
6250 DSG
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
510
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
H.16
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
PARAMETERS OF
6700 PCM
DISPLAYING
OPERATION TIME Data type: Bit
AND NUMBER OF PCM M code that counts the total number of machined parts and the
PARTS number of machined parts
0: M code specified by M02, M30, and parameter No. 6710
1: Only M code specified by parameter No. 6710
M code that counts the total number of machined parts and the number of
6710 machined parts
NOTE
Set value 0 is invalid (the number of parts is not counted for
M00). Data 98 and 99 cannot be set.
511
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
When the number of machined parts reaches the specified number, the
PRTSF signal for posting notification that the required number of
parts has been reached is output to the PMC. When 0 has been set in
this parameter, however, the specification of an infinite number of
parts is assumed, such that PRTSF is not output.
Setting entry is acceptable.
Data type: 2–word
Unit of data: ms
Valid data range: 0 to 60000
512
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
513
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
H.17
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
PARAMETERS OF
7100 HDLPM THD
EXTERNAL PULSE
INPUT Data type: Bit
THD External pulse input in TEACH IN JOG mode
0: Invalid
1: Valid
HDLPM 0: If external pulses at a high frequency are supplied, the
amount of movement may not match the number of
pulses supplied.
1: If external pulses at a high frequency are supplied, the
amount of movement is made to match the number of
pulses supplied.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7670 EXH
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when EPCON = 1.
(When EPCON = 0, DI signal setting only is enabled.)
514
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
515
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
H.18
PARAMETERS OF 7181
First–time return distance used during execution of the bump–type refer-
ence position setting cycle
REFERENCE POINT
SETTING FUNCTION Data type: 2–word axis
BY PRESSING AXIS Unit of data:
TO STOPPER Increment system
Valid data range
IS-B
Milimeter machine 0.001
Inch machine 0.0001
Rotation axis 0.001
NOTE
When the reference position setting cycle operation is
started in the direction specified inbit 5 (ZMIx) of parameter
No. 1006, the algebraic sign (direction of operation) of the
values specified in parameter Nos. 7181 and 7182 should
match the direction set in bit 5 (ZMIx) of parameter No.
1006. If the directions do not match, the reference position
setting cycleoperation cannot be activated even when a
start signal is entered.
516
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
Axis move speed for reference position setting used during execution of the
7185 bump–type reference position setting cycle
NOTE
If the parameter is 0, an override of 100% is assumed to be
specified.
517
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
H.19
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
PARAMETERS OF
AXIS CONTROL BY 8001 RDE OVE MLE
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
8010 DI/DO group selection for each axis during PMC axis control
518
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
This parameter sets which DI/DO group should be used for a control
axis command for each axis during axis control by the PMC.
Set value Description
1 DI/DO A group (G142 to G153)
2 DI/DO B group (G154 to G165)
3 DI/DO C group (G166 to G177)
4 DI/DO D group (G178 to G189)
5 DI/DO E group (G226 to G237)
6 DI/DO F group (G238 to G249)
519
B–62683EN/03 Index
[Numbers] Configuration, 4
Connecting a Touch Panel, 203
1st Reference Position Return, 273
Connecting the Frame Ground (FG) of the Control
20–pin Interface Connectors and Cables, 436 Unit, 27
2nd, 3rd Reference Position Return Signals (Output) Connection, 117, 203, 208
ZP2n, ZP3n <F096, F098>, 278
Connection Allowing the Handy Operator’s Panel to
be Detached, 187
Connection Diagram, 59
[A] Connection Diagram AT Using Built–in I/O, 40
Action Against Noise, 24 Connection Diagram AT Using Built–in I/O Card, 41
Address List, 225 Connection of Buil–in I/O Card C, 100
Address Lists, 380 Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Electric Cable, 53
Adjusting the LCD, 145 Connection of FANUC I/O Link Optical Fiber Cable,
Adjusting the Separate Type PDP, 140 54
Connection of I/O Card D/E, 75
Alarm Classification Signal (Output) ALPS1 to
ALPS3, ALPS, ALOT, ALOH, ALSV <F250#0 to Connection of I/O Units to Machine Interface, 50
#6>, 253
Connection of Input Power Supply, 42
Alarm Signal (Output) AL <F001#0>, 250
Connection of the FANUC I/O Link, 52
Alphanumeric Key Type (A02B–0211–C020#R), 388,
391 Connection of the FANUC I/O Unit–model A, 57
APC Alarm Type Signals (Output) APCMn, APOVn, Connection to CNC Peripherals, 124
APFEn, APPEn, APPSn, APBZn, APBVn, APBLn Connection to FANUC I/O Link–II, 115
<F236 to F241>, 254
Connection to Internal I/O Units (High–speed DI Sig-
Automatic Operation, 292 nal Interface), 111
Automatic Operation Signal (Output) OP <F000#7>, Connection to the Handy Operator’s Panel, 185
298
Connection Using GENIUS, 116
Auxiliary Function Lock Signal (Input) AFL
<G005#6>, 313 Connection Using PROFIBUS–DP, 115
i–1
Index B–62683EN/03
Cycle Start Lamp Signal (Output) STL <F000#5>, Fanuc I/O Link Function, 340
297
FANUC Standard Unit LED On/Off Information Out-
Cycle Start Signal (Input) ST <G007#2>, 293 put, 391
Feed Axis Direction Select Signal (Input) +Jn, –jn,
<G100, G102>, 263
i–2
B–62683EN/03 Index
Interface with Servo Amplifier, 183 Mode Select Signal (Input) MD1, MD2, MD4
<G043#0 to #2>, 258
Interlock, 268
Momentary Power Failure, 49
Interlock Signal (Input) *It<G008#0>,
*RILK<X000#6, X1000#6>, 269 Mounting and Dismounting Modules, 58
Interlock Signal for each Axis and Direction (Input) Moving Direction Signals MVDn <F106>, 251
+MITn, –mITn <G132, G134>, 270
Interrupt Signal for Custom Macros (Input) UINT
<G053#3>, 348
[N]
Necessary Items, 392
Noise Suppressor, 28
[J]
Jog Feed, 262
[O]
Operation Mode Confirmation Signals, 261
[K] Optional Block Skip Signal (Input) BDT (BDT1),
Keeping the Handy Operator’s Panel Connected at All BDT2-bDT9 <G044#0,G045>, 302
Times, 196 Outer Dimensions, 57
Key Input on Panel of FANUC Standard Unit, 388 Outputting Parameters, 455
Key Input on the Panel, 385 Override Cancel Signal (Input) OVC <G006#4>, 301
Keyboard, 135
[P]
[L] Parallel/Serial Interface Conversion Unit, 221
LED On/Off Information Output, 387 Parameter of Reader/Punch Interface, 461
Parameter Setting, 222
Parameters of Acceleration/Deceleration Control, 476
[M] Parameters of Axis Control by PMC, 518
Parameters of Axis Control/ Increment System, 464
M Code in Multipath Mode, 310
Parameters of CRT/MDI, Display, and Edit, 497
M Decode Signals (Output) DM00, DM01, DM02,
DM30 <F009#7, #6, #5, #4>, 313 Parameters of Custom Macros, 506
M Function, 308 Parameters of DI/DO, 493
M Function at 1–path Control Mode, 308 Parameters of Displaying Operation Time and Num-
ber of Parts, 511
Machine Lock Signal (Input) MLK <G044#1>, 300
Parameters of External Pulse Input, 514
Manual Absolute Signal (Input) *ABSM <G006#2>,
266 Parameters of Feedrate, 472
Parameters of Programs, 503
Manual Feedrate Override (Input) *JV0 to
*JV15<G010,G011> , 264 Parameters of Reference Point Setting Function by
Pressing Axis to Stopper, 516
Manual Rapid Traverse Select Signal (Input)
RT<G019#7>, 265 Parameters of Servo, 483
Mechanical Handle Feed, 325 Parameters of Setting, 459
Mechanical Interface of Built–in I/O, 120 Parameters of Stroke Limit, 471
Memory Protection Key (Input) Key1 to Key4 Parameters of Tool Compensation, 505
<G046#3-#6>, 291 Parameters Related to Pattern Data Input, 509
Mirror Image Signal (Input) MIn <G106>, 304 Paramters of Coordinates, 469
Miscellaneous Function, 307 PMC Key Data Reference Function (Output), 320
Mode Select, 257 Power Capacity, 8
i–3
Index B–62683EN/03
i–4
B–62683EN/03 Index
Torque Control Function Based on DI Signal Input, Video and Power Supply Interface (for Separate
366 Type), 143
Torque Control Function Based on Input From the
PMC, 367
Torque Control Function Based on Parameter Input,
[W]
365 Waiting Function (Output) WAT1 to WAT4 <F209#0
to #3>, (Input) WFN1 To WFN4 <G214#0 to #3>,
Torque Limit Function, 363 314
Total Connection, 39 When External Power Supply Is Used, 177
When One Detachable LCD/MDI Unit is Shared by
Multiple Power Mate Units, 153
When the simultaneous block start function is not
used, 153
[V] When the Simultaneous Block Start Function is Used,
158
V–READY Waiting Signal (Output)
WVRDY;<F209#4>, 375 Workpiece Number Search Signal (Input) PN0 to PN7
<G009>, 298
Video and Power Supply Interface, 137, 139
i–5
Revision Record
01 Mar., ’95